Handleiding JRC JMA9922_9XA (pagina 400 van 404) (Engels)

MARINE RADAR

EQUIPMENT

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

9900

LCD

1087/1089

NKE-1079/1075ANKE-1079/1075ANKE-1079/1075A

NKE-1079/1075A

Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.

Transmitter-receiver Unit Type NTG-3037/3037A

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1075/1075A (12 Feet)

―xi―

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-7(7 Feet）

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1089-9(9 Feet）

Transmitter-receiver Unit Type

NTG-3028

―xii―

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1087-6（6 Feet）

Scanner Unit Type NKE-1087-9（9 Feet）

−xiii−

Display Unit Type NCD-4263(Self-standing Type)

―xiv―

NWZ-158T 形モニタ部ユニット（卓上形）（オプション）

NDC-1297T 形制御ユニット（卓上形）（オプション）

NCE-7721T 形キーボードユニット（卓上形）（オプション）

NDC-4263-T 形指示機（卓上形）（オプション）

Monitor Unit Type NWZ-158T (Desktop Type) (Option)

Control Unit Type NDC-1279T (Desktop Type) (Optyon)

Keyboard Unit Type NCE-7721T (Desktop Type) (Option)

Display Unit Type NCD-4263T (Desktop Type) (Option)

- xv -

CONTENTS

PREFACE ....................................................................................... i

Before Operation .......................................................................... ii

Cautions to be Used during Operation ................................... iii

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION

■ Cautions for high voltage .................................................................v

■ What to do in case of electric shock ..............................................v

FIRST-AID TREATMENTS

☆ First-aid treatments ..........................................................................vi

☆ When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped ....................vii

☆ When both pulse and breathing have stopped .........................viii

EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ..................................................... ix

GLOSSARY ................................................................................ xxi

1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

1.1 FUNCTIONS ....................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 FEATURES ......................................................................................... 1-3

1.3 CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 1-5

1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWING ...................................................................... 1-7

1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM ....................................................1-20

1.6 COLLISION AVOIDANCE ...............................................................1-27

2. NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL

SWITCHES AND FUNCTION OF

SOFTWARE BUTTONS

2.1 NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES ....... 2-1

2.2 FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS .........................................2-7

- xvi -

3. BASIC OPERATION

3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION .................................................................... 3-1

■ Power ON and Start the System .................................................. 3-2

■ Observe and Adjust Video ........................................................... 3-4

■ Tuning Operations ......................................................................... 3-6

■ Acquire and Measurement Data .................................................. 3-7

■ End the Operation and Stop the System ................................... 3-7

3.2 MENU COPOSITION .........................................................................3-8

3.3 PREPARATION ................................................................................ 3-11

■ Tuning[TUNE] ............................................................................... 3-11

■ Sensitivity Control [GAIN] .......................................................... 3-11

■ Display Brilliance Control ...........................................................3-12

■ Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO] ...............................................3-12

■ Sea Clutter Suppression [RAIN] ................................................3-13

■ Brilliance Control .........................................................................3-13

■ Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT] ..................................3-21

■ Color Setting [COLOR] ...............................................................3-22

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS .....................................................................3-34

■ Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball ...............................3-34

■ Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball ..............3-35

■ Use EBLs(Electronic Bearing Lines) ........................................3-41

■ Set Floating EBL ..........................................................................3-43

■ Set Floating EBL ..........................................................................3-45

■ Select Range [RANGE] ...............................................................3-47

■ Set Maximum Range ...................................................................3-47

■ Select Pulse Length ....................................................................3-48

■ Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ..............................3-49

■ Cancel Ship's Heading Line [HL OFF] ......................................3-49

■ Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor

Mark [+] [DATA OFF] ....................................................................3-49

■ Display PI (Parallel Index Lines) [PI] .........................................3-50

■ Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENTER] ...............3-53

■ Display Other Ship's Trails [TRAILS] ........................................3-54

■ Display Own Ship's Tracks and Own Symbols[OWN SHIP] ..3-55

■ Marking [MARK] ...........................................................................3-58

■ Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS] ....................................3-59

■ Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2] .....................3-59

■ Set Guard Zone [GUARD ZONE] ...............................................3-61

■ Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ..........................................3-63

■ Set Alarm Sound Level ...............................................................3-63

- xvii -

■ Check Operation Status [TEST] ................................................3-64

■ FUNCTION ....................................................................................3-73

■ Expand Targets ............................................................................3-74

■ Display Processed Videos .........................................................3-75

■ Reduce Radar Interference ........................................................3-76

■ Personal Information ..................................................................3-77

■ Display of Navigational Information .........................................3-80

■ Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch ............................3-96

■ Operation of Performance Monitor ...........................................3-97

■ EBL Maneuvering ......................................................................3-103

4. MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

■ Measurement by Trackball ........................................................... 4-1

■ Measurement by Range Rings ....................................................4-2

■ Measurement by EBLs and VRMs ..............................................4-2

■ Measurement by between Two Optional Points ....................... 4-4

5. OPERATION OF ARPA AND AIS

Using ARPA .............................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 INITIAL SETTING ...............................................................................5-2

■ Setting Collision Decision Criteria : SAFE LIMIT ..................... 5-2

■ Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) ....................................5-4

■ Setting Range Scale : RANGE SCALE ....................................... 5-4

■ Setting Own Ship's Speed ............................................................ 5-5

5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING ............................................................... 5-7

■ Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] ...................................... 5-7

■ Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ............................... 5-7

5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY ................................................................. 5-8

5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION .................................................................... 5-9

■ Automatic Acquisition [AUTO] .................................................. 5-11

■ Manual Acquisition [MANUAL] .................................................5-12

■ Use of Automatic and Manual

Acquisition Modes [ACQ AUTO] [ACQ MANUAL] ............... 5-13

5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY .....................................................................5-13

■ Display of Vectors ........................................................................5-13

■ Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN] ..................................5-16

5.6 DATA DISPLAY ................................................................................5-18

■ Types of Data Display .................................................................5-18

■ Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] ......................5-19

- xviii -

■ Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA] .............5-19

5.7 ALARM DISPLAY .............................................................................5-20

■ Dangerous Target Alarm: CPA/TCPA .......................................5-20

■ Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE] ..........................................5-21

■ Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET] ..........................................5-22

■ System Function Alarm [ARPA(DATA)] ...................................5-23

■ Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO] .....................................................5-23

5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING ..................................................................5-24

■ Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode .............................5-24

■ Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ......................5-25

■ Using the TRIAL Function ..........................................................5-26

5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS ..............................................5-27

■ Deleting Targets ...........................................................................5-27

5.10 ARPA SETTING .............................................................................5-29

■ Simulation .....................................................................................5-30

■ Gate Size .......................................................................................5-32

■ Test Video ......................................................................................5-34

6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

■ Radar Wave with the Horizon ...................................................... 6-1

■ Strength of Reflection from the Target ....................................... 6-3

■ Sea Clutters .................................................................................... 6-3

■ False Echoes .................................................................................. 6-3

■ Display of Radar Transponder (SART) ......................................6-6

7. MAINTENANCE

7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ............................................................... 7-1

7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT .................................................... 7-2

■ Scanner NKE-1079/10750/1089/1087 .......................................... 7-2

■ Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3037A/3028 ..................... 7-4

■ Display Unit NCD-4263 ................................................................. 7-5

■ Coaxial Cable JMA-9933-SA ........................................................ 7-5

■ Wave Guide JMA-9923-7XA/9XA ................................................ 7-6

8. COUNTERMEASURES FOR

TORUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT

8.1 FUNCTION CHECK ........................................................................... 8-1

■ Function Check on Test Menu ..................................................... 8-2

■ List of Alarms and other Indications ........................................8-10

- xix -

8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8-13

8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE ........................................8-14

8.4 REPLACEMNT OF MAJOR PARTS ..............................................8-20

■ Replacement of Magnetron (V1/V201) .....................................8-21

■ Replacement to TRHPL

(A202/A203)(JMA-9933-SA/9932-SA) .......................................8-21

■ Replacement of Diode Limiter(A203)

(JMA-9923-7XA/9XA, JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)................................8-20

■ Replacement of PIN Attenuator(A302)

(JMA-9923-7XA/9XA, JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)...............................8-21

■ Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor ............................8-22

8.5 ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................8-23

■ Tuning Adjustment ......................................................................8-24

■ Bearing Adjustment ....................................................................8-25

■ Range Adjustment .......................................................................8-26

■ Antenna Height Adjustment ......................................................8-27

■ Vector Constant ...........................................................................8-28

■ Quantization Level .......................................................................8-29

■ Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log .............8-30

■ Main Bang Suppression Adjustment .......................................8-32

8.6 SETTING ...........................................................................................8-34

■ True Bearing Setting ...................................................................8-34

■ Ship Speed Setting ......................................................................8-35

■ Navigation Equipment Setting ..................................................8-37

■ Current Correction(SET/DRIFT) Setting ...................................8-38

■ Time/Day Display Setting ...........................................................8-40

■ Adjustment of Performance Monitor(NJU-63/64) ...................8-42

■ Adjustment of Inter switch...........................................................8-44

9. AFTER-SALES SERVICE

■ When you Request for Repair ..................................................... 9-1

■ Recommended Maintenance ....................................................... 9-1

■ Radar Failure Check List .............................................................. 9-2

- xx -

10. DISPOSAL

10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT .............................................................10-1

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES .............................................10-1

10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON .........................................10-1

11. SPECIFICATION

11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ....................................................... 11-1

11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ....................................................... 11-2

11.3 JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................................. 11-3

11.4 JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................................. 11-4

11.5 SCANNER(NKE-1079) .................................................................. 11-5

11.6 SCANNER(NKE-1075) .................................................................. 11-6

11.7 SCANNER(NKE-1089-7/9............................................................... 11-7

11.8 SCANNER(NKE-1087-6/9) ............................................................ 11-8

11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT(NTG-3037) ........................... 11-9

11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT(NTH-3028) ....................... 11-10

11.11 DISPLAY UNIT(NCD-4263) ....................................................... 11-11

11.12 ARPA ...........................................................................................11-12

11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR(NJU-63) ....................................11-13

11.10 PERFORMANCE MONITOR(NJU-64) ....................................11-13

APPENDIX

JMA-9900 ARPA Series Radar System Composition ...................... A-1

JMA-9900 ARPA Series Radar System Circuit Block ....................... A-2

Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA and JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

Fig.102 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA and JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

Fig.103 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA

(SELF STANDING TYPE)

Fig.104 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA

(DESK TOP TYPE)

Fig.105 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA

(SELF STANDING TYPE )

Fig.106 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA

(DESK TOP TYPE )

Fig.107 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 3φ)

Fig.108 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)

Fig.109 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 3φ)

Fig.110 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)

- xxi -

Fig.111 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 3φ)

Fig.112 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

(SELF STANDING TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)

Fig.113 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 3φ)

Fig.114 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

(DESK TOP TYPE AC220V 1φ AC100V 1φ)

Fig.115 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA

Fig.116 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA

Fig.117 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

Fig.118 Primary Power Supply lock Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

Fig.119 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079

Fig.120 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1079-D

Fig.121 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,

Type NKE-1075/1075A (100V AC,1-phase)

Fig.122 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,

Type NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,3-phase)

Fig.123 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit,

Type NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,1-phase)

Fig.124 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1089-7/9 (1-phase)

Fig.125 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1089-7/9 (3-phase)

Fig.126 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1087-6/9 (1-phase)

Fig.127 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1087-6/9 (3-phase)

Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3037/3037A

Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3028

Fig.130 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.131 Internal Connection Diagram of CRT Monitor of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.132 Internal Connection Diagram of Power Supply of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.133 List of NSK and LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.134 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.135 Setting Table of Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches of

Display Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.136 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 2-unit Interswitchesystem, Type NQE-3141N

Fig.137 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 3-unit Interswitches

System, Type NQE-3141N

Fig.138 Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141N

Rejection

Use as a temporary marker

9900

In addition, a radar switching function ( interswitch ) can be added to switch between two, four or eight

eight radar units. However, in order to this function for four or eight units, an external switching box is

necessary.

23.1 inch color raster-scan LCD display unit

LCD

the soft button on a screen and screen menu.

9900

9933

9923

9932

9923

9922

9933

9922

9923

9932

9933

1087-9

1087-6

1089-9

1089-7

1079

NTG-3037A

3028

4263

230

100/230V

230

NTG-3037

-1075 (*)

-1075A (*)

NKE

230

1075/1075A

1079

1089-7

1089-9

1087-6

1087-9

3037/3037A

3028

4263

158T

1279T

7721T

Fig.1.1 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1079

1―8

Fig.1.2 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1075

1―9

Fig.1.3 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1089-7

1―10

Fig.1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1089-9

1―11

Fig.1.5 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1087-6

1―12

Fig.1.6 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

SCANNER UNIT,TYPE NKE-1087-9

1―13

Fig.1.7 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT,TYPE NTG-3037/3037A

1―14

Fig.1.8 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF

TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT,TYPE NTG-3028

1―15

Fig.1.9 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF DISPLAY UNIT,

TYPE NCD-4263(SELF-STANDING TYPE)

1―16

Fig.1.10 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF MONITOR UNIT,

TYPE NWZ-158 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)

1―17

Fig.1.11 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF CONTROL UNIT,

TYPE NDC-1279 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)

1―18

Fig.1.12 EXTERIOR DRAWING OF KEYBOARD UNIT,

TYPE NCE-7721 (DESKTOP TYPE)(OPTION)

1―19

Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9933-SA

Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9932-SA

Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923-7XA

Fig.1.16 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9923-9XA

Fig.1.17 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922-6XA

Fig.1.18 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF RADAR,TYPE JMA-9922-9XA

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1−21

１

SK-32C

(5A)

GYRO

LOG

ＧＰＳ

250V-MPYCYS-5

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

250V-TTYCS-1

660V-TPYCYS-5.5

AC110/220V

60Hz, 1φ

AC220V

60Hz, 3φ

800VA

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-2695110056

MAX 35MT φ23 (JRC SUPPLY)

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-2695110056

MAX 30MT φ23 (JRC SUPPLY)

NTG-3037 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT

COAXIAL CABLE

HF-20D (JRC SUPPLY)

NKE-1079 SCANNER UNT

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

CIRCUIT BREAKER

OPTION)

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110V

50/60Hz, 1φ, 200W

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and

navigation due to operation of the radar.

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.

(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)

Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar

should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and

navigation due to operation of the radar.

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.

(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)

Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar

should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

Note:

Fig.1.13 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

RADAR, TYPE JMA-9933-SA

SHIP'S MAIN

9933

3038

4 2 6 3

AC100/230V

50/60Hz, 1

AC230V

50/60Hz, 3

1kVA

Φ

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1−22

１

SK-32C

(5A)

NKE-1075 SCANNER UNIT

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

CIRCUIT BREAKER

（OPTION）

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110V

50/60Hz,1φ,100W

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-2695110056

MAX 65MT φ23（JRC SAPPLY）

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

250V-MPYCYS-5

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

250V-TTYCS-1

660V-TPYCYS-5.5

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110/220/230V

60Hz, 1φ

AC220/230V

60Hz, 3φ

800VA

GIRO

LOG

GPS

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and

navigation due to operation of the radar.

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.

(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)

Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar

should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

Note:

Fig.1.14 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

RADAR, TYPE

JMA-9932-SA

9932

4 2 6 3

AC100/230V

50/60Hz, 1

AC230V

50/60Hz, 3

1kVA

Φ

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1−23

１

NKE-1089-7 SCANNER UNIT

SK-32C

(5A)

GYRO

LOG

GPS

250V-MPYCYS-5

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

250V-TTYCS-1

660V-TPYCYS-5.5

NCD-4263 DISPAY UNIT

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110/220/230V

60Hz, 1φ

AC220/230V

60Hz, 3φ

600VA

NTG-3028 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

CIRCUT BREAKER

(OPTION)

H-2695110056

MAX 35MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)

H-2695110056

MAX 30MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110V

50/60Hz, 1φ, 100W

FR-9 (JRC SAPPLY)

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and

navigation due to operation of the radar.

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.

(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)

Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar

should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

Note:

Fig.1.15 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

RADAR, TYPE

JMA-9923-7XA

9923

4 2 6 3

- 1 0 8 9 - 7

3028

AC100/230V

50/60Hz, 1

AC230V

50/60Hz, 3

800VA

Φ

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1−24

１

NKE-1089-9 SCANNER UNIT

SK-32C

(5A)

GYRO

LOG

GPS

250V-MPYCYS-5

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

250V-TTYCS-1

660V-TPYCYS-5.5

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110/220/230V

60Hz, 1φ

AC220/230V

60Hz, 3φ

600VA

NTG-3028 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

CIRCUIT BREAKER

(OPTION)

H-2695110056

MAX 35MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)

H-2695110056

MAX 30MT φ23 (JRC SAPPLY)

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110V

50/60Hz, 1φ, 100W

FR-9 (JRC SAPPLY)

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and

navigation due to operation of the radar.

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.

(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)

Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar

should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

Note:

Fig.1.16 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

RADAR, TYPE JMA-9923-9XA

9923

AC100/230V

50/60Hz, 1

AC230V

50/60Hz, 3

800VA

Φ

- 1 0 8 9 - 9

4 2 6 3

3028

AC100/230V

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1−25

１

SK-32C

(5A)

NKE-1087-6 SCANNER UNIT

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

CIRCUIT BREAKER

（OPTION）

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110V

50/60Hz,1φ,100W

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-2695110056

MAX 65MT φ23（JRC SAPPLY）

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

250V-MPYCYS-5

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

250V-TTYCS-1

660V-TPYCYS-5.5

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110/220/230V

60Hz, 1φ

AC220/230V

60Hz, 3φ

600VA

GYRO

LOG

GPS

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and

navigation due to operation of the radar.

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.

(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)

Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar

should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

Note:

Fig.1.17 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

RADAR, TYPE JMA-9922-6XA

9922

- 1 0 8 7 - 6

4 2 6 3

AC100/230V

50/60Hz, 1

AC230V

50/60Hz, 3

800VA

Φ

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1−26

１

SK-32C

(5A)

NKE-1087-9 SCANNER UNIT

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

CIRCUIT BREAKER

（OPTION）

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110V

50/60Hz,1φ,100W

14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-2695110056

MAX 65MT φ23（JRC SAPPLY）

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

250V-MPYCYS-5

250V-DPYCYS-1.25

250V-TTYCS-1

660V-TPYCYS-5.5

SHIP'S MAIN

AC100/110/220/230V

60Hz, 1φ

AC220/230V

60Hz, 3φ

600VA

GYRO

LOG

GPS

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and

navigation due to operation of the radar.

All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio equipment.

(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder. etc)

Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar

should not run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.

Note:

Fig.1.18 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM OF

RADAR, TYPE JMA-9922-9XA

9922

- 1 0 8 7 - 9

4 2 6 3

AC100/230V

50/60Hz, 1

AC220V

50/60Hz, 3

800VA

Φ

SECTION 2

NAME AND FUNCTION OF

CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES

AND FUNCTION OF

SOFTWARE BUTTONS

NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES.......................2-1

FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS.......................................................2-6

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-1

2

NAME AND FUNCTION OF CONTROL PANEL SWITCHES

Screen Display Example

6

S

P

A

U

T

O

H

D

G

O

S

T

A

B

G

N

D

S

P

E

D

M

A

N

C

O

G

S

O

G

2

4

5

.

0

°

k

t

s

1

5

.

0

W

A

T

E

R

2

7

9

.

1

°

k

t

s

9

.

2

3

0

.

0

°

k

t

s

9

.

0

A

C

U

I

R

E

°

n

m

°

1

3

7

.

1

4

.

5

1

4

2

5

2

.

1

3

5

゜

3

1

.

6

7

5

'

E

1

3

9

゜

4

3

.

7

3

'

O

F

C

E

N

T

E

R

C

P

A

R

I

N

G

V

R

M

1

°

n

m

2

.

2

0

1

.

7

0

E

B

L

1

T

1

3

5

.

0

T

0

3

7

.

0

°

n

m

0

1

0

2

0

3

0

4

0

5

0

6

0

7

0

8

0

9

0

1

0

1

0

1

2

0

1

3

0

1

4

0

1

5

0

1

6

0

1

7

0

1

8

0

1

9

0

2

0

2

1

0

2

0

2

4

0

2

5

0

2

6

0

2

7

0

2

8

0

2

9

0

3

0

3

1

0

3

2

0

3

0

3

4

0

3

5

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

R

a

n

g

e

m

a

r

k

e

r

i

n

t

e

r

v

a

l

T

r

u

e

M

o

t

i

o

n

(

T

M

)

/

R

e

l

a

t

i

v

e

M

o

t

i

o

n

(

R

M

)

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

o

r

B

e

a

r

i

n

g

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

o

r

R

a

n

g

e

s

c

a

l

e

T

r

a

n

s

m

i

t

/

S

t

a

n

d

b

y

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

o

r

X

/

S

b

a

n

d

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

o

r

(

i

n

u

s

e

o

f

2

-

f

r

e

q

u

e

c

y

s

c

a

n

e

r

o

n

l

y

)

I

n

t

e

r

s

w

i

t

c

h

c

o

n

e

c

t

i

o

n

p

a

t

e

r

n

P

u

l

s

e

w

i

d

t

h

T

u

n

i

n

g

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

o

r

S

e

a

c

l

u

t

e

r

s

u

p

r

e

s

i

o

n

(

S

E

A

)

A

U

T

O

R

a

i

n

/

s

n

o

w

c

l

u

t

e

r

s

u

p

r

e

s

i

o

n

(

R

A

I

N

)

M

A

N

U

A

L

R

a

d

a

r

i

n

t

e

r

f

e

r

e

n

c

e

r

e

f

l

e

c

t

o

r

R

a

d

a

r

v

i

d

e

o

t

r

a

c

k

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

i

n

t

e

r

v

a

l

O

w

n

s

h

i

p

'

s

t

r

a

c

k

m

e

m

o

r

y

i

n

t

e

r

v

a

l

R

a

d

a

r

v

i

d

e

o

e

n

h

a

n

c

e

m

o

d

e

O

w

n

s

h

i

p

'

s

p

o

s

i

t

i

o

n

S

a

f

e

t

y

s

h

i

p

s

y

m

b

o

l

H

L

S

h

i

p

'

s

h

e

a

d

i

n

g

m

a

r

k

e

r

(

d

i

s

p

l

a

y

e

d

t

o

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

e

t

h

e

t

r

u

e

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

o

f

o

w

n

s

h

i

p

'

s

h

e

a

d

i

n

g

m

a

r

k

e

r

w

i

t

h

g

y

r

o

c

o

m

p

a

s

c

o

n

e

c

t

e

d

)

T

a

r

g

e

t

s

h

i

p

v

e

c

t

o

r

T

a

r

g

e

t

s

h

i

p

s

y

m

b

o

l

i

n

d

a

t

a

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

T

a

r

g

e

t

s

h

i

p

I

D

T

a

r

g

e

t

s

h

i

p

'

s

t

r

a

i

l

V

R

M

1

O

w

n

s

h

i

p

'

s

t

r

a

c

k

E

B

L

1

V

R

M

2

E

B

L

2

G

u

a

r

d

z

o

n

e

C

u

r

s

o

r

m

a

r

k

E

B

L

1

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

E

B

L

2

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

V

R

M

2

r

a

n

g

e

V

R

M

1

r

a

n

g

e

T

:

T

r

u

e

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

R

:

R

e

l

a

t

i

v

e

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

C

u

r

s

o

r

m

a

r

k

p

o

s

i

t

i

o

n

(

w

i

t

h

G

P

S

)

R

e

l

a

t

i

v

e

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

o

f

c

u

r

s

o

r

m

a

r

k

T

r

u

e

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

o

f

c

u

r

s

o

r

m

a

r

k

S

p

e

d

s

e

n

s

o

r

(

M

A

N

U

A

L

/

L

O

G

（

1

-

a

x

i

s

）

/

2

A

X

W

（

2

-

a

x

i

s

l

o

g

w

a

t

e

r

）

/

2

A

X

G

（

2

-

a

x

i

s

g

r

o

u

n

d

）

C

u

r

e

n

t

s

e

t

C

u

r

e

n

t

d

r

i

f

t

(

O

p

e

r

a

b

l

e

V

R

M

1

s

e

l

e

c

t

e

d

)

O

f

c

e

n

t

e

r

3

5

°

3

5

.

0

'

E

1

3

9

°

4

0

.

0

'

D

a

t

e

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

A

R

P

A

S

T

A

B

G

N

D

3

4

3

.

8

2

7

9

.

2

1

.

0

5

9

8

.

6

T

a

r

g

e

t

s

h

i

p

I

D

T

r

u

e

b

e

a

r

i

n

g

(

d

e

g

)

T

a

n

g

e

(

n

m

)

T

r

u

e

c

o

u

r

s

e

(

d

e

g

)

C

P

A

(

n

m

)

T

C

P

A

(

m

i

n

)

B

C

R

(

n

m

)

B

C

T

(

m

i

n

)

2

0

3

/

0

3

/

1

8

1

4

：

3

6

V

E

C

T

O

R

L

I

M

I

T

m

i

n

6

m

i

n

1

0

n

m

1

.

5

P

A

S

T

P

O

S

N

G

U

A

R

D

Z

O

N

E

G

u

a

r

d

z

o

n

e

S

E

T

D

R

I

F

T

U

O

W

N

M

A

N

T

1

m

i

n

2

T

A

R

G

E

T

I

D

N

o

1

B

R

G

C

O

U

R

S

E

S

P

E

D

R

A

N

G

E

C

P

A

T

C

P

A

B

C

R

B

C

T

°

n

m

°

n

m

k

t

s

m

i

n

m

i

n

2

6

4

3

.

5

2

8

1

9

.

3

0

.

4

-

2

5

8

1

.

4

B

R

G

C

O

U

R

S

E

S

P

E

D

R

A

N

G

E

C

P

A

T

C

P

A

B

C

R

B

C

T

°

n

m

°

n

m

k

t

s

m

i

n

m

i

n

T

A

R

G

E

T

I

D

N

o

2

1

C

O

V

R

M

2

E

B

L

2

N

R

E

L

T

R

U

E

（

）

C

U

R

S

O

R

A

C

T

D

A

C

T

1

R

M

N

U

P

T

R

A

N

S

M

I

T

X

-

B

A

N

D

A

l

a

r

m

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

i

o

n

P

e

r

s

o

n

a

l

c

o

d

e

n

a

m

e

N

A

V

l

i

n

e

n

a

m

e

D

i

s

p

l

a

y

i

n

f

o

r

m

a

t

i

o

n

T

r

u

e

s

p

e

d

(

k

n

o

t

)

C

P

A

r

i

n

g

（

O

N

/

O

F

)

F

u

n

c

t

i

o

n

o

p

e

r

a

t

e

d

b

y

t

r

a

c

k

b

a

l

A

u

t

o

t

u

n

i

n

g

(

M

A

N

U

A

L

i

n

d

i

c

a

t

e

d

i

n

M

a

n

u

a

l

t

u

n

i

n

g

)

R

a

d

a

r

v

i

d

e

o

p

r

o

c

e

s

i

n

g

m

o

d

e

T

a

r

g

e

t

s

h

i

p

d

a

t

a

2

C

P

A

s

e

t

u

p

V

e

c

t

o

r

t

i

m

e

T

C

P

A

s

e

t

u

p

2

3

0

2

1

0

2

0

2

1

0

2

0

3

m

i

n

0

.

5

m

i

n

P

R

O

C

1

P

R

O

C

T

R

A

I

L

S

T

R

A

C

K

R

A

I

N

G

A

I

N

T

E

N

H

O

F

S

E

A

I

R

N

o

A

l

a

r

m

P

I

N

T

O

K

Y

O

N

A

V

D

I

S

P

L

A

Y

I

N

F

O

M

E

N

U

P

I

G

Z

T

E

S

T

A

C

K

H

L

O

F

D

E

P

T

H

F

U

N

C

3

1

0

m

D

A

Y

1

P

A

N

E

L

S

H

I

F

T

M

A

P

-

+

F

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-2

2

Name and Function of Control Panel Switches

1

2

3 4

5

6

7

8 9

10 11

12

14

15

13

16

17

18

19

20

21 22 23

24

25 26 27

28

29

30

PWR

ACK

PWR FAIL

ALARM

ACK

EBL1 EBL2

PANEL

DAY

NIGHT

TGT

DATA

ACQ

MANUAL

ACQ

CANCEL

AIS/

ARPA

H L

OFF

DATA

OFF

USER

OPTION

1

OPTION

2

VRM1 VRM2

TUNE RAIN SEA GAIN

POWER

TX

STBY

T/R

VECT

RANGE

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-3

2

① [POWER] (Power Supply) Switch

This switch is used to turn the power on and off. The lamp lights when this switch is on.

When the power is on and it cannot be turned off for some reason, depressing this switch for five

seconds will force the power off.

② [PWR ACK] (Power Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

When this switch is set to ON, the lamp lights to start the system.

In order for this key to work, an external battery is required (normally a power supply separate

from the AC unit).

③ [TX/STBY] (Operation) Switch

The「STANDBY｣ will appear at the upper left of the radar display about 3 minutes after

the [PWR] switch is set to ON. Then, press this switch, and transmission will be started.

Pressing the switch during transmission sets the equipment to the standby state.

④ [ALARM ACK] (Alarm Acknowledgment) Switch

Press this switch to acknowledge a failure, approach of a target, or collision alarm.

⑤ [TUNE] (Turning) Control

Tunes the target signals to display the targets most clearly on the radar display.

Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.

⑥ [RAIN] (Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression) Control

Reduces the clutter echo caused by rain and snow.

Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the

target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.

⑦ [SEA] (Sea Clutter Suppression) Control

Reduces the clutter echo caused by the surface of the sea.

Be careful not to set this adjustment too high. Setting this adjustment too high may cause the

target to be erased. Switching between AUTO and MANUAL can be done by pressing the knob.

⑧ [GAIN] (Receiving Sensitivity) Control

Controls the radar receiving sensitivity.

Adjust the GAIN to a point where the background static does not interfere with operation.

⑨ [RANGE +/-] (Range Scale Select) Switch

Selects a range scale from 0.125 to 96 (or 120) nautical miles.

⑩ [EBL1] (Electric Bearing Line 1) Switch

Selects and displays EBL1. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this

switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the

floating setting.

⑪ [EBL2] (Electric Bearing Line 2) Switch

Selects and displays EBL2. Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this

switch if valid. When depressed for two seconds or longer, this switch selects ON/OFF for the

floating setting.

⑫ [EBL] (Electric Bearing Line) Control

Rotates the bearing of the EBL that is selected by EBL1 and 2.

⑬ [VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) Switch

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-4

2

Selects and displays VRM1.

Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid.

⑭ [VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) Switch

Selects and displays VRM2.

Switches between ON and OFF, and the function for which this switch if valid.

⑮ [VRM] (Variable Range Marker) Control

Changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRM1 and 2.

⑯ [T/R VECT] (TM/RM Mode Select) Switch

Selects the ARPA vector display in the TM or RM mode.

⑰ [TGT DATA] (Target Data Setup) Switch

This switch is used to display numeric data of ARPA being tracked and AIS being displayed.

When this switch is depressed for two seconds, the numeric display next to symbols will be

turned on and off.

⑱ [ACQ MANUAL] (Manual Acquisition) Switch

This switch turns on and off manual acquisition of ARPA targets.

When this key is pressed, the cursor mode is changed to the manual acquisition setting mode.

⑲ [ACQ CANCEL] (Acquisition Cancel) Switch

This switch cancels the symbol and vector of an ARPA target being tracked, and stops tracking

the target.

If depressed for two seconds or longer, that tracking of all targets will be cancelled. (ARPA

display)

When using with AIS, pressing this for two seconds, all targets will be paused and displayed.

⑳ [DAY/NIGHT] (Day/Night Mode Select) Switch

Switches the screen color and brilliance according to the DAY, DAY2, NIGHT1 and NIGHT2

setting.

[AIS/ARPA]

Selects whether to use the ACQ MANUAL and ACQ CANCEL keys with ARPA or AIS.

[HL OFF] (Heading Line Off) Switch

The ship’s heading line (HL) can be cancelled as long as this switch is depressed.

[DATA OFF]

While this switch is depressed, graphics other HL, the range ring, EBL and VRM will be deleted

temporarily.

[PANEL] (Operation Panel Brightness) Switch

Controls the brightness of the controls and switches on the operation panel.

[USER]

The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that

option.

At the time of factory shipments, it is set as ON of the function which switches the vector length

of "ARPA" in 60 minutes, and OFF.

21

22

23

24

25

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-5

2

[OPTION1]

The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that

option.

The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.

[OPTION2]

The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to operate that

option.

The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.

[Trackball]

The trackball is used to move the cursor to arbitrary locations on the screen. It is used to make

settings in the various modes.

It is used to specify the center position of floating EBLs and specify the off center position.

[Left Trackball Button]

This button Is used to select various modes and confirm numeric input.

In the MARK mode, it is used to confirm the screen mark. During manual acquisition of ARPA,

it is used to confirm acquisition.

[Right Trackball Button]

In the MARK mode, this button is used to delete screen marks.

During manual acquisition of ARPA, it is used to release acquisition.

[BRILL] Control

Controls the brilliance of the entire display panel.

Brilliance knob is located right-hard if a screen.

26

27

28

29

30

31

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-6

2

FUNCTION OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS

This radar provides software buttons on the screen which can be used to set important functions

directly and swiftly without opening a menu.

6

AUTO

HDG

OS STAB GND

SPEED

MAN

COG

SOG

245.0 °

kts

15.0

WATER

279.1

°

kts

9.2

30.0

°

kts

9.0

ACUIRE

°

nm

°

137.1

4.514

252.1

35゜31.675'

E139゜43.773'

OFF

CENTER

CPA

RING

VRM1

°

nm

2.20

1.70

EBL1

T 135.0

T 037.0 °

nm

000 010

020

030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170180190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330

340

350

35°35.0000'

E139°40.0000'

DEPTH

ARPA STAB GND

344

3.8

279

9.2

1.0

5988.6

2003 / 03 / 18 14：36

FUNC3

VECTOR

LIMIT

min

6

min

10nm1.5

PAST POSN

GUARD ZONE

U

OWN

MAN

1 min

2

TARGET ID No 1

BRG

COURSE

SPEED

RANGE

CPA

TCPA

BCR

BCT

°

nm

°

nm

kts

min

nm

min

264

3.5

281

9.3

0.4

-2581.4

BRG

COURSE

SPEED

RANGE

CPA

TCPA

BCR

BCT

°

nm

°

nm

kts

min

nm

min

TARGET ID No 2

1

C

O

VRM2

EBL2

100m

N

REL

TRUE

（）CURSOR

ACT

D

ACT

1

RM NUP

TRANSMIT

X-BAND

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

GAIN

T

ENH OFF

DAY1

PANEL

-+

SP

T

HL OFF

SHIFT

MAP

SET

DRIFT

1

2

3 4 5

6

7

8

９

10

11

12

13

15

17

1819 20 21 14

16

22 23

24

2526

27

28 29 30 31

32 33

34 35 36

IR

No Alarm

TOKYO

DISPLAY INFO

MENU P I GZ TEST

ACK

NAV

41 42

43

37 38 39

40

44

45

46 47 48 49

50

51

By positioning the arrow cursor on the buttons indicated by  to in the figure above and then

pressing the left trackball button, the settings can be changed in the ways described below.

51

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-7

2

① Range selection

Changes the radar range.

“+”: Increases the range by one step. (The maximum range is 96 or 120 nautical miles.)

“-”: Decreases the range by one step. (The minimum range is 0.125 nautical mile.)

② RINGS indicator selection

Turns on and off the fixed distance scale display. When this is turned on, the intervals of the

range rings will be displayed. When this is turned off, then “OFF” will be displayed.

③ Pulse width selection

Select the pulse width. There are three pulse widths: Short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP)

and long pulse (LP). The pulse widths that can be used depend on the range being used. If a

change cannot be made, then nothing will be displayed. This setting is stored for each range.

④ Tuning indicator mode

Sets the tuning mode to MANUAL or AUTO.

MANUAL → AUTO

（Manual tuning）→（Automatic tuning）

⑤ Bearing mode selection

This has the same function as the [AZI MODE] switch. It switches between North-up (true

bearing), Head-up (relative bearing) and Course-up. Each time this button is clicked it will step

through the settings in the following order: “N UP” ⇒ “C UP” ⇒ “H UP”

⑥ Motion mode selection

The screen display is changed between the True Motion (TM) and Relative Motion (RM)

displays. Clicking this button will switch between “TM” and “RM.” (R) indicates a relative trail.

(T) indicates a true trail.

⑦ Transmission/Standby selection

About three minutes after the [PWR] switch is turned on, the “PREHEAT” indication on the upper

left of the screen will change to “STANDBY.”

STANDBY: Indicates that the unit is in the standby state. Clicking the switch at this time will

change the unit to the transmission state.

TRANSMIT: Indicates that the unit is in the transmission state. Clicking the switch at this time

will change the unit to the standby state.

⑧ Change Interswitch connection

This is displayed if Interswitch is connected. The indicator shows the connected scanner and

the connection status of the indicator. When this switch is pressed, a menu to change the

connection states of the scanner and indicator will be displayed. The scanner and indicator

connection states cannot be changed, unless the master indicator is in the standby state.

⑨ AIS target refreshed (ACT)

When this switch is pressed, the AIS target will be activated.

⑩ AIS target deactivated (DACT)

When this switch is pressed, the activated AIS target is paused.

⑪ ARPA symbol indicator selection

Turns the ARPA symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is

clicked.

⑫ AIS symbol indicator selection

Turns the AIS symbol indicator on or off. The setting is changed each time this button is

clicked.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-8

2

⑬ Radar interference reflector function selection

Turns on and off the radar interference reflector (IR). The IR is turned on or off each time this

switch is clicked.

⑭ Radar reception scale (GAIN)

This indicates the degree the knob has been turned.

⑮ Sea clutter suppression function (SEA) selection

Selects either manual or automatic sea clutter suppression. The bar on the right indicates the

position in the manual mode.

⑯ Sea scale

This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto

mode,“AUTO”will be displayed.

⑰ Rain/snow clutter suppression function (RAIN) selection

Selects either manual or automatic rain/snow clutter suppression. The bar on the right

indicates the position in the manual mode.

⑱ Rain scale

This indicates the amount the knob has been turned in manual mode. When in auto mode,

“AUTO”will be displayed.

⑲ Own ship’s trail indication interval function (TRACK) selection

Turns on and off the own ship’s trail indication interval.

⑳ Radar trail indicator function (TRAILS) selection

Sets the time intervals for radar trails. OFF, 0.5MIN, 1MIN, 3MIN, or 6MIN can be selected.

Image processing function (PROC) selection

Sets the image processing mode. OFF, PROC1, PROC2 or PROC3 can be selected.

Radar trail mode selection

Sets true trail or relative trail when operating the radar trail function.

“T” is displayed when true trails are used and “R” is displayed for relative trails.

This setting is also limited by the radar bearing mode.

When the North-up (N UP) mode is used, switching between “T” and “R” is possible.

When the Course-up (C UP) mode is used, only “T” is set.

When the Head-up (H UP) mode is used, only “R” is set.

Radar image enhance (ENH) function selection

Turns on and off the radar image enhance function. It is turned on or off each time this switch is

clicked.

Cursor mode selection

Sets the cursor mode. Clicking this button will display a pull-down menu. After setting the

mode, the cursor can be moved and the left trackball button used to make various settings.

Because all the modes are to be used during radar transmission, a mode may not operate

properly if it is selected in the standby state.

Off center mode selection

This has the same function as the [OFF CENT] switch. Shifts the own ship position within the

screen (within 60% of the scope’s radius) to display a wider range in an arbitrary direction.

When this button is pressed when the system is already in the off center mode, then the off

center function will be turned off.

21

22

23

24

25

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-9

2

Heading line off setting

Has the same function as the [HL OFF] key. While this switch is clicked, the heading lines (HL)

display will be turned off.

CPA RING indicator selection

Turn on and off the CPA RING display.

When the vector mode is TRUE, the CPA RING cannot be turned on.

MAP SHIFT

This is used to mode maps made by users.

DEPTH

This displays the depth received from external devices.

The □ button can be used to turn on and off the depth graph display.

DAY/NIGHT setting

This button selects the day or night mode. The mode changes each time this button is clicked.

There are four settings: DAY1→ DAY2 → NIGHT1 → NIGHT2.

PANEL/BRILL VIDEO/BRILL ARPA setting

The modes PANEL, VIDEO, and ARPA which adjust luminosity are switched.

The mode changes each time this button is clicked.

There are three settings: PANEL→VIDEO→ARPA.

Brilliance adjustment

Each time this switch is clicked, it will go to the next of four (BRILL VIDEO) or five (PANEL,

BRILL ARPA) brilliance settings.

Process setting function (FUNC) selection

Sets the process setting mode. OFF, FUNC1, FUNC2, FUNC3, FUNC4, or FUNC5 can be

selected.

, , , : EBL and VRM settings

The EBL1, EBL2, VRM1, and VRM2 switches are used to acquire operation rights.

They function in the same way as the EBL1 and 2 and VRM1 and 2 switches on the control

panel.

The numeric indicator switches are used to turn on and off the various EBLs and VRMs.

When a numeric indicator displays “OFF,” that means the corresponding indicator in the PPI is

off.

The switches on the control panel are used to move the EBLs and VRMs.

EBL1 T051.0 °

EBL2 T135.0 °

● VRM1 0.30 nm

○ VRM2 0.60 nm

EBL1 starting point mode

Sets whether the EBL1 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary

position on the radar screen. This has the same function as depressing the EBL1 switch on the

control panel for a long period.

26

27

28

29

30

32

This is used to turn ON and OFF either EBL or VRM operation, and turn ON and OFF the display.

The function that is valid is indicated by the inverted display.

EBL and VRM intersection identification marks

When ON: The numeric display is off.

When OFF: The numeric display is on.

33

3534 36 37

38

31

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-10

2

C: CENTER Indicates that the EBL1 starting point is at the own ship position.

O: OFFSET Indicates that the EBL1 starting point is not at the own ship position.

In this state, the starting point may be at the cursor position or it may be fixed at an arbitrary

position on the screen. When the button is clicked, the starting point will move with the

cursor position, then when the left button is clicked the starting point will be fixed at the

cursor location.

L: After moving the L/L FIX EBL1 starting point, the starting point is fixed by the latitude and

longitude values.

If the starting point moves out of the screen, then it will be reset automatically so that the

starting point is at the own ship position.

Note: When the EBL1 starting point moves, the mode O or L is indicated by the position

selected among the EBL OFFSET ORIGIN menu.

EBL2 starting point mode

Sets whether the EBL2 starting point is placed at the center of the own ship or at an arbitrary

position on the radar screen.

Everything else is the same as that for the EBL2 starting point mode.

Speed unit setting

Sets the speed unit.

Clicking this button will open a pull-down menu. A unit can be selected from one of the

following. An alarm is activated if the selected speed unit is not connected to the radar.

Options: MANUAL, LOG (1-axis log), 2AXW (2-axis over water), 2AXG (2-axis over ground),

GPS

If the speed unit setting is “MANUAL,” then placing the cursor over the numeric section and left

clicking will allow numeric input.

SET/DRIFT

Turns on and off SET/DRIFT correction.

If CORRECTION is on for this setting, then “CORR” will be displayed next to the button. The

number displayed next to “CORR” at this time will be valid. Also, correction can only be set

when the speed unit is in the MANUAL or LOG (1-axis log) modes.

SET setting

Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This

setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.

DRIFT setting

Placing the cursor over the numeric section and left clicking will allow numeric input. This

setting is only valid if CORRECTION is ON.

Date display mode

Sets the date mode to be displayed on the screen.

: Turns off the time display.

: Global time display (UCT).

: Local time display (LOCAL).

ARPA, PAST POSN vector mode setting

These set the vector display mode.

T: True vector

R: Relative vector

These settings work concurrently.

40

41

42

43

39

U

L

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

2-11

2

Guard zone 1 ON/OFF function setting

Turns the guard zone 1 function on or off.

Guard zone 2 ON/OFF function setting

Turns the guard zone 2 function on or off.

MAIN MENU setting

This button has the same functions as the MENU switch on the control panel.

Clicking this button will display the “MAIN MENU.”

PI menu setting

Clicking this button will open the “PI” menu.

This menu is used to set and display parallel index lines (PI).

GZ menu setting

Clicking this button will open the “GZ” menu.

This menu will turn on and off the range settings for guard zone 1 and 2.

TEST menu setting

Clicking this button will open the “TEST” menu.

Checks the operational status of the radar equipment.

Navigation information readout (NAV)

Opens a list of navigation information files stored in the NAV/MAP INFO Menu.

Personal code name (PIN)

Opens a list of personal code files in the PIN Menu.

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION................................................3-1

Power ON and Start the System .........................................3-2

Observe and Adjust Video...................................................3-4

Tuning Operations...............................................................3-7

Acquire and Measurement Data .........................................3-8

End the Operation and Stop the System.............................3-8

3.2 MENU COMPOSITION.................................................3-9

3.3 PREPARATION...........................................................3-12

Tuning [TUNE] ..................................................................3-12

Sensitivity Control [GAIN] .................................................3-12

Display Brilliance Control ................................................3-12

Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO].......................................3-13

Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA].........................................3-13

Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN] ............................3-14

Brilliance Control...............................................................3-14

Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT] ..........................3-22

Color Setting [COLOR] .....................................................3-22

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS.................................................3-34

Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball.........................3-34

Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackbal ...........3-34

Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines)................................3-41

Set Floating EBL ...............................................................3-43

Set Floating EBL ...............................................................3-45

Select Range [RANGE].....................................................3-47

Set Maximum Range.........................................................3-47

Select Pulse Length ..........................................................3-48

Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] .......................3-48

Cancel Ship’s Heading Line [HL OFF] ..............................3-49

Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor Mark

[+] [DATA OFF]..................................................................3-49

Display PI（Parallel Index Lines ）[PI] ............................3-50

Move Own Ship’s Display Position [OFF CENTER] .........3-53

Display Other Ship’s Trails [TRAILS] ................................3-54

Display Own Ship’s Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN

TRACK].............................................................................3-55

Marking [MARK]................................................................3-58

Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS] ............................3-59

Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2] ..............3-59

Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONE]....................................3-61

Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ..................................3-63

Set Alarm Sound Level .....................................................3-63

FUNCTION .......................................................................3-65

Expand Targets.................................................................3-66

Display Processed Videos ................................................3-67

Reduce Radar Interference...............................................3-68

Personal Information.........................................................3-69

Display of Navigational Information ..................................3-72

Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch..................... 3-88

Operation of Performance monitor....................................3-89

EBL Maneuvering .............................................................3-95

SECTION 3

BASIC OPERATION

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-1

３

 Do not put anything on the operation panel. If you put anything hot on it, it

may be deformed.

 Do not apply sudden force to the operation panel, trackball and controls.

Otherwise, some failure or damage may result.

3.1 FLOW OF OPERATION

Each operation will be described in detail below.

POWER ON AND START

THE SYSTEM

OBSERVE AND ADJUST

VIDEO

TUNING OPERATIONS

ACQUIRE AND

MEASUREMENT DATA

END THE OPERATION AND

STOP THE SYSTEM

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-2

３

 Wait approximately 10 seconds before turning on the power again.

 A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is suddenly interrupted during

operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again.

 Immediately after the radar is installed, if the system is not used for a long time,

or after the magnetron is replaced, warm-up the equipment in the standby mode

for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it to the transmit mode.

 If the warm-up time is short, the magnetron may cause sparks, resulting in an

unstable oscillation.

Start transmission on a short-pulse range and then send long pulses

sequentially. If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, reset the system

to the standby mode immediately and maintain it in the standby mode for 5 to 10

minutes before restarting the operation. Repeat these steps until the operation

is stabilized.

Power ON and Start the System･･･････････････････････････

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-3

３

POWER

TX

STBY

POWER

TX

STBY

1 Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.

2 Press .

Orange lamp on

→

The warm-up time will appear.

3 Wait for completion of warm-up

When the warm-up time expires, the warm-up time screen disappears and

the PREHEAT display on the upper-left corner of the radar display is

changed to STANDBY .

4 Press .

The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.

The STANDBY on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed

to TRANSMIT .

Attention: Even if is pressed before STANDBY is displayed, radar

transmission is not performed.

The method of transmission in case of emergency.

1 Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.

2 Press .

Orange lamp on →

The warm-up time will appear.

3

A push of the

5 seconds or more vanishes the display of

warm-up time.

The radar transmission and the scanner start rotating.

The STANDBY on the upper-left corner on the radar display is changed

to TRANSMI

Note:

In the moment sag of a power supply, and the case of an unusual

operation outbreak, it can transmit, immediately after rebooting the power

supply.

Please do not use emergent transmitting operation except the above.

The life of a magnetron will be shortened if the warm-up is not completed.

Procedures

POWER

TX

STBY

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-4

３

 In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed

because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.

Use the normal [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.

 In the AUTO RAIN mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed

because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.

Use the manual [SEA control during sailing under normal conditions.

 The AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN mode cannot be used concurrently. If one is

set to AUTO mode, the other will be set to MANUAL mode.

Observe and Adjust Video････････････････････････････････

1 Press to set the range to the scale required for

target

observation.

2 Turn the or monitor brilliance knob.

Adjust to obtain the clearest targets.

Attention

Procedures

RANGE

GAIN

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-5

３

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

GAIN

T

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

GAIN

T

AUTO

SEA

In case of Using AUTO SEA/SEMI AUTO:

1 Press . Or, when the SEA button on

the screen is pressed, AUTO is set.

The AUTO Menu will appear.

SEA AUTO is displayed at the lower left of the radar

screen.

1 Press . Or, when the SEA button on

the screen is pressed,SEMI AUTO is set.

The SEMI AUTO Menu will appear.

SEA A is displayed at the lower left of the radar

screen.

1 Press . Or, press the SEA button

on the screen .

AUTO is released.

Note: When setting AUTO SEA / SEMI AUTO, the AUTO RAIN is set to the MANUAL

mode. Both AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN cannot be set at the same time.

AUTO

Cancellation

SEMI AUTO

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

T

SEA

A

GAIN

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-6

３

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

GAIN

T

SEA

In case of Using AUTO RAIN:

1 Press . Or, press the SEA

button on the screen .

RAIN AUTO is displayed on the radar

screen.

1 AUTO is released using the same

procedure that was used to set it.

Procedures

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

GAIN

T

AUTO

Cancellation

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-7

３

 When the receiver is detuned, the best video may not be obtained even if the

maximum bar graph is displayed on the AUTO TUNE tuning indicator. In this

case, adjust the [TUNE] control manually so that the best video is presented.

TUNE

Tuning Operations･･･････････････････････････････････････

1 Press and select any range scale from 0.125 to 96

(or 120) NM. (The current range scale is

displayed at the upper left of the radar

display.)

The range scale becomes shorter by pressing and longer by

pressing

.

2 ROTATE .

Adjust the video to present the clearest targets.

If there is no adequate target, adjust [TUNE] control to indicate the maximum

bar graph on the turning indicator at the upper left of the radar display.

In case of Using AUTO TUNE:

1 Press . Or, press MANUAL

button.

“AUTO” in “2.TUNE” will be set and “AUTO” will

appear at the upper left of the radar display.

1 Repeat the procedures up to step 2

in case of using AUTO TUNE.

“MANUAL”in“2.TUNE”will be set and“AUTO”at

the upper left of the radar display will change

to“MANUAL”and AUTO TUNE mode will be

cancelled.

Attention

Procedures

Cancellation

RANGE

AUTO

1.SEA/RAIN

1.MANUAL

2.TUNE

MANUAL

AUTO

０．

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-8

３

POWER

TX

STBY

Acquire and Measurement Data･･･････････････････････････

For detailed operations for data acquisition and measurement, refer to Section 3.4 “BASIC

OPERATIONS” and Section 4 “MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING”.

End the Operation and Stop the System････････････････････

1 Press .

The radar transmission will end and the scanner will stop rotating.

The indication TRANSMIT will be changed to STANDBY .

Maintain the “STANDBY” mode if radar observation is restarted in a

relatively short time. Observation can be restarted simply by pressing

the [TX/STBY] switch..

2 Press .

The power will be turned off. Orange lamp Off →

Note: When "PWR" is lit, data is being written to internal memory, so do not

open the shipboard breaker.

Also, when turning on the power supply again, be sure that the green

PWR switch lamp is off before pressing "PWR".

Exit

POWER

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-9

３

3.2

MENU COMPOSITION

The Menu system of this radar equipment consists of the Main menu, Sub1 menu, Sub2 menu and

Test menu.

Click MENU button on the screen.

The Main menu consists of the items of signal processing functions and EBL control, and

other functions are included in the Sub1 menu. The video color setting is included in the Sub2

menu.The Test menu consists of the items of input monitoring and Self-diagnostic functions.

Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the "MENU" key.

SUB2 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

COLOR

SUB1 MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.

5.

6.

SUB2 MENU

7.

8.

9.

SETTING1

LEVEL

NAV/MAP INFO

TRACK

ARPA

ISW

EBL MANEUVER

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TUNE

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

CODE INPUT

7.

8.

9.

TEST MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.MAG　CURRENT

5.PM

6.

7.

SELF CHECK

PANEL TEST

ARPATEST

ERROR LOGGING

SYSTEM INFO

OFF ON

2.TGT ENH

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-10

３

A. Main menu

1 Displaying the Main menu.

Click the MENU button on the

screen.

The main menu will appear.

2. Ending the Main menu.

Click the EXIT button on the

screen.

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

B. Sub1 menu

1 Displaying the Sub1 menu.

Click the SUB1 MENU button on

the screen.

The SUB1 Menu will appear.

2 Ending the Sub1 menu.

Click the EXIT button on the

screen.

The SUB1 Menu will be closed.

Note: When the unit is shipped from the factory, this is set in "OPTION2" or the

"MENU" key.

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TUNE

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

CODE INPUT

7.

8.

9.

SUB1 MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.

5.

6.

SUB2 MENU

7.

8.

9.

SETTING1

LEVEL

NAV/MAP INFO

TRACK

ARPA

ISW

EBL MANEUVER

2.TGT ENH

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-11

３

C. Sub2 Menu

1 Displaying the Sub2 menu.

Press MENU, then SUB1 MENU and

SUB2 MENU or press MENU, then

MENU and MENU.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2. Ending the Sub2 menu.

Press EXIT or MENU.

The Sub2 Menu will be closed.

D. Test menu

1 Displaying the Test menu.

Click TEST .

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Ending the Sub1 menu.

Click EXIT or MENU.

The Sub2 Menu will be closed.

SUB2 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

COLOR

TEST MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.MAG　CURRENT

5.PM

6.

7.

SELF CHECK

PANEL TEST

ARPATEST

ERROR LOGGING

SYSTEM INFO

OFF ON

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-12

３

3.3 PREPARATION

Tuning [TUNE]････････････････････････････････････････････

This control is used to tune the receiver.

If the receiver is detuned from the best level, the receiving sensitivity falls, and the targets on a long

range or the small targets on a short range may be overlooked.

In manual tuning, rotate the [TUNE] control clockwise or anticlockwise and adjust so that the target

echoes are the clearest. If no suitable target is present, adjust the control so that the tuning

indicator bar graph at the upper left of the radar display is maximized.

After setting the radar to the TRANSMIT mode, it take about 10 minutes until the oscillation

frequency of the magnetron is stabilized. Therefore, tune the receiver once again after about 10

minutes.

For automatic tuning, set “TUNE” to “ON” in the AUTO Menu. (Refer to page 3-8).

Sensitivity Control [GAIN]･････････････････････････････････

This control is used to control the radar receiving sensitivity.

Clockwise rotation of the [GAIN] control increases receiving sensitivity and extends the radar

observation range. If the sensitivity is too high, the receiver noise will increase to reduce the

contrast of the targets with the background video and make the targets obscure on the display. To

observe densely crowded targets or the targets on a short range, rotate the [GAIN] control

anticlockwise to reduce the sensitivity so that the targets are easy to observe. Be careful not to

overlook small and important targets.

Display Brilliance Control ･････････････････････････････････

This control is used to adjust the brilliance of the entire display.

Clockwise rotation of the [BRILL] control increases the brilliance of the entire display. Adjust the

[BRILL] control to obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance.

TUNE

GAIN

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-13

３

 In the AUTO SEA mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed

because the sea clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.

Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.

 In the AUTO RAIN mode, there are cases in which the targets are not displayed

because the rain/snow clutter returns are suppressed in a simple way.

Use the manual [SEA] control during sailing under normal conditions.

Contrast Control [BRILL VIDEO]･･･････････････････････････

The contrast of the radar video display can be adjusted in four levels. Press the PANEL button on

the screen, then select [BRILL VIDEO]. Each time the brilliance button is clicked, the screen

will switch to VIDEO . The current mode is displayed on the lower right of

the radar screen. (The VIDEO indication will change to the PANEL indicated in several second.)

Adjust the [BRILL VIDEO] switch to obtain the best-to-see video with optimum contrast.

Sea Clutter Suppression [SEA]････････････････････････････

This control is used to reduce the receiving sensitivity on a short range to suppress the sea clutter

returns.

Clockwise rotation of the [SEA] control can suppress sea clutter returns more effectively. Be

careful not to suppress sea clutter excessively. Otherwise, small buoys and boats may disappear

from the radar display.

When setting “SEA” to “SEA AUTO” , sea clutter returns can be suppressed depending on their

intensity levels. This setting is used for the case in which the sea clutter returns are different in

their directions.

Switching between manual and auto is done by clicking the“SEA AUTO” / “SEMI AUTO”button on

the lower left of the screen, or pressing the“SEA”knob.

Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO / SEMI AUTO SEA mode and the AUTO

RAIN mode at the same time.

Attention

SEA

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-14

３

Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression [RAIN]･････････････････････

This control is used to suppress rain or snow clutter returns. Clockwise rotation of the [RAIN]

control makes clearer those targets that may be hidden among rain/snow clutter returns. Be

careful not to overlook small targets in the clutter. This control also has the effect of reducing sea

clutter, so that it is more effective to use this control together with the [SEA] control.

Rotate the control anticlockwise to the maximum in the normal condition.

When setting SEA/RAIN to AUTO RAIN in the AUTO Menu, rain/snow clutter can be suppressed

depending upon the intensity level. When setting SEA/RAIN to MANUAL in the AUTO Menu, the

mode is changed into the MANUAL mode.

Switching between manual and auto is done by clicking the "RAIN AUTO" button on the lower left of

the screen, or pressing the "RAIN" knob.

Note: It is not allowed to use both the AUTO RAIN mode and AUTO SEA mode at the

same time.

Brilliance Control････････････････････････････････････････

Press . Or press the right side of "PANEL" on the screen.

The BRILLIANCE switches [PANEL], [BRILL VIDEO], and [BRILL ARPA] are used to adjust the

brilliance of the panel, video and ARPA markers. Each time a switch is pressed, the brilliance is

increased by one level up to 4 or 5 levels. When the maximum level is reached, the brilliance is

reset to the original panel.

[PANEL] Adjusts the lighting for the characters on the controls and switches on the

operational panel.

When PANEL on the screen is pressed, the adjustment status of "BRILL

VIDEO" and "BRILL ARPA" are changed.

Then, each of the levels can be set if the brilliance level button on the right is

pressed.

[BRILL VIDEO] Adjusts the brilliance of radar display.

[BRILL ARPA] Adjusts the brilliance of ARPA information

Brilliance Control by Menu Operation

[RANGE RINGA] Adjusts the brilliance of the fixed range scale.

[VRM] Adjusts the brilliance of the variable range scale (VRM1 and VRM2).

[EBL] Adjusts the brilliance of electronic bearing cursor (EBL1 and EBL2).

[CHARACTER] Adjusts the brilliance of characters.

RAIN

PANEL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-15

３

1 Click the MENU on the screen. Or press the OPTION2 button .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click LEVEL.

The LEVEL Menu will appear.

4 Click the level setting section of RANGE RINGS .

1.RANGE RINGS will be selected and the following pull-down menu will

appear.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO(ECHO)

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

4.LEVEL4

1.LEVEL1

2.LEVEL2

3.LEVEL3

4.LEVEL4

5.LEVEL5

7.LEVEL7

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-16

３

5 Select any level from 1 to 4 for RANGE RINGS brilliance in

the pull-down menu and press it.

The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4.

6 Click the level setting section of VRM .

2.VRM will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

7 Select any level from 1 to 4 for VRM (VRM1 and VRM2)

brilliance in the pull-down menu and press it.

The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4.

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO(ECHO)

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

4.LEVEL4

5.LEVEL5

7.LEVEL7

1.LEVEL1

2.LEVEL2

3.LEVEL3

4.LEVEL4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-17

３

8 Click the level setting section of EBL .

3.EBL will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

9 Select the brightness of the electronic cursor (EBL1, EBL2)

from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 4 with the

trackball, then click.

The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4.

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO(ECHO)

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

4.LEVEL4

5.LEVEL5

7.LEVEL7

1.LEVEL1

2.LEVEL2

3.LEVEL3

4.LEVEL4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-18

３

10 Click the level setting section of CHARACTER .

4.CHARACTER will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

11 Select the character brightness from the pull-down menu,

and set 1 through 4.

The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4 .

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO(ECHO)

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

4.LEVEL4

7.LEVEL7

1.LEVEL1

2.LEVEL2

3.LEVEL3

4.LEVEL4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-19

３

12 Click the level setting section of VIDEO .

5.VIDEO (ECHO) will be selected and the following pull-down menu will

appear.

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO(ECHO)

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

4.LEVEL4

1.LEVEL1

2.LEVEL2

3.LEVEL3

4.LEVEL4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-20

３

13 Select the echo brightness from the pull-down menu, and set

1 through 4.

The default value is set to 4.LEVEL4 .

14 Click the level setting section of ARPA .

6.ARPA will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０

．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO(ECHO)

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

5.LEVEL4

4.LEVEL4

1.LEVEL0

2.LEVEL1

3.LEVEL2

5.LEVEL4

4.LEVEL4

4.LEVEL3

15 Select the ARPA brightness from the pull-down menu, and

set 1 through 5.

The default value is set to 5.LEVEL4 .

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-21

３

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

7.LEVEL7

4.LEVEL4

5.LEVEL4

After the brilliance levels are adjusted, the following menu will appear.

The menu display after adjustment shows the level values set for the indiviual

brilliance items

.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

These set brilliance levels are saved depending upon the Day/Night mode.

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-22

３

Day/Night Mode Selection [DAY/NIGHT]････････････････････

Whenever the [DAY/NIGHT] switch is pressed, the mode is changed over from DAY1 → DAY2

→ NIGHT1 → NIGHT2 and the current mode is indicated at the lower right of the radar

display. The brilliance levels selected for each mode are saved. For brilliance adjustment, refer to

page 3 -12. For selection of DAY/NIGHT mode by menu operation, refer to “Color Setting” on the

next page.

Color Setting [COLOR]･･･････････････････････････････････

T

he colors of the Day/Night mode [Day1, 2/NIGHT1, 2], system, background color outside the

bearing scale, background color inside the bearing scale, echoes, characters, dials, own ship’s track,

and radar trails are set up.

Color Adjustment by Menu Operation

[DAY/NIGHT] Register of DAY/NIGHT mode

[SYSTEM] System color adjustment

[OUTER PPI] Adjustment of the background color outside the bearing scale

[INNER PPI] Adjustment of the background color inside the bearing scale

[CHARACTER] Adjustment of character colors

[DIAL] Adjustment of dial color

[ECHO] Adjustment of echo colors

[TRAILS] Adjustment of the color of radar trails

[OWN TRACK] Adjustment of the color of own ship’s track

1 Click the MENU on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click SUB2 MENU .

The Sub2 Menu will appear.

4 Click COLOR .

The COLOR Menu will appear.

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-23

３

5 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of DAY/NIGT.

1.DAY/NIGHT will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

6 Select the Day/Night mode from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 4 with the trackball, then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.DAY1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

1.DAY1

2.DAY2

3.NIGHT1

4.NIGHT2

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

9.OWN TRACK

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-24

３

7 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of SYSTEM.

2.SYSTEM will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

8 Select the System color from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 4 with the trackball, then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

1.BLUE1

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

1.DAY

2.BLUE2

3.GRAY

4.BLACK

9.OWN TRACK

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-25

３

9 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of OUTER PPI.

3.OUTER PPI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

10 Select the background color outside the bearing scale from

the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,

then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

1.BLACK

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

1.DAY

2.BLUE

3.D-BLUE

1.BLACK

9.OWN TRACK

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-26

３

11 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of INNER PPI.

4.INNER PPI will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

12 Select the background color inside the bearing scale from

the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the trackball,

then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

1.BLACK

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

1.DAY

2.BLUE

3.D-BLUE

1.BLACK

9.OWN TRACK

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-27

３

13 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of CHARACTER.

5.CHARACTER will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

14 Select the character color from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

1.DAY

2.AMBER

3.GREEN

1.BLACK

9.OWN TRACK

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-28

３

15 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of DIAL.

6.DIAL will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

16 Select the dial color from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

1.DAY

2.AMBER

3.GREEN

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

9.OWN TRACK

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-29

３

17 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of ECHO.

7.ECHO will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

18 Select the echo color from the pull-down menu, select 1

through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

9.OWN TRACK

1.SKY

1.DAY

3.AMBER

2.GREEN

1.BLACK

1.YELLOW

1.WHITE

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-30

３

19 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of TRAILS.

8.TRAILS will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

20 Select the radar trails colors from the pull-down menu, select

1 through 3 with the trackball, then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

9.OWN TRACK

1.SKY

1.DAY

3.GREEN

2.WHITE

1.BLACK

1.SKY

1.WHITE

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-31

３

21 Left-click the selection section (combo box) of

OWN TRACK.

9.OWN TRACK will be selected and the following pull-down menu will appear.

22 Select the own track colors from the pull-down menu, select

1 through 6 with the trackball, then left-click.

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

9.OWN TRACK

1.SKY

1.DAY

2.GREEN

3.WHITE

1.BLACK

1.SKY

1.WHITE

4.YELLOW

5.PINK

6.BLUE

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-32

３

After the colors are adjusted, the following menu will appear.

The menu display after adjustment shows the colors set for

indiviual items.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub2 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub2 Menu will be closed.

Exit

3.OUTER PPI

SUB2 MENU

2.SYSTEM

０．

EXIT

4.INNER PPI

5.CHARACTER

6.DIAL

7.ECHO

COLOR

1.DAY/NIGHT

1.YELLOW

1.BLUE1

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

8.TRAILS

1.SKY

9.OWN TRACK

1.SKY

1.DAY

1.BLACK

1.WHITE

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-33

３

 When watching a radar beacon or a SART signal, set the following parameter to

suppress the video.

IR OFF (Interference Rejecter OFF).

IR

.......Radar Interference Rejection【IR】････････････････････

Left-click the . This switch selects ON/OFF.

○ When setting from the menu

1 Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click "ON" radio button of IR .

“ON”in“1.IR”will be set.

Then, the mark at the lower left of the radar display will be shown and

the radar interference in turned on.

1 Click "OFF" radio button of IR .

“OFF”in“1.IR”is set and the radar interference rejector turned off.

1 Click EXIT .

The Main Menu will be closed.

Procedures

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TGT ENH

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

CODE INPUT

7.

8.

9.

Cancellation

Exit

Attention

IR

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-34

３

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS

Move Cross Cursor Mark [+] by Trackball･･･････････････････

The cross cursor mark [+] is used for position designation and other purposes in various operating

procedures. The cross cursor mark [+] moves in conjunction with the trackball. If the trackball is

rotated up and down or left and right, the cross cursor mark follows the movements of the trackball.

The distance and bearing between own ship and the cross cursor mark [+] are indicated on the

upper right of the radar display. Before operating other controls and switches, the operator must be

familiar with manipulation of the trackball and the movements of the cross cursor mark. When

rotating the trackball, the cross cursor mark [+] will not move if the palm is apart from the hand

sensor section. Approach the palm to the hand sensor section and operate the trackball.

When making a menu or button selection, the "+" cursor will change to .

Click: In this manual, "clicking" refers to pressing the trackball button.

Left-button = This is called "left-clicking".

Methods for Setting Menu Items with the Trackball･･････････

In addition to the method for setting menu items with the switches, the trackball can also be used to

set menu items in almost the same manner as with the control panel.

There are several methods for setting an item in a menu with the trackball.

Trackball

Trackball section

left button

Trackball section

right button

Sclool button

No used

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-35

３

[Ⅰ] Change the Setting of Radio Button Type

When an item has alternative selections, for example, ON and OFF, radio buttons are

provided to set the item in many menu items.

① ON OFF

When the current item is set in the OFF position as shown in Figure ①,

② ON OFF

Move the arrow cursor to the ON position with the trackball.

③ ON OFF

With the arrow cursor on the ON position, press the left button of the trackball.

④ ON OFF

The Setting will change from OFF to ON.

When changing from ON to OFF, operate in the same manner.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-36

３

[Ⅱ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method is used when there are three or more selections:

① When PROC1 is set as shown below:

2. PROC1

▼

② Move the arrow cursor to the position that is shown below (downward triangle).

2. PROC1

▼

③ Set the arrow cursor on the position in Figure  as shown below and press the left button

on the trackball.

2. PROC1

▼

④ The pull-down menu will appear and selection items are displayed in the menu.

2. PROC1

▼

1. OFF

2. PROC1

3. PROC2

4. PROC3

⑤ Move the cursor with the trackball.

2. PROC1

▼

1. OFF

2. PROC1

3. PROC2

4. PROC3

⑥ Set the cursor on the item to be selected and press the left-button on the trackball.

3. PROC2

▼

1. OFF

2. PROC1

3. PROC2

4. PROC3

⑦ The pull-down menu will be closed and the setting is established.

3. PROC2

▼

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-37

３

10.0

[Ⅲ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method can be used in most of boxes where a numeric value is to be entered.

① 0.0-100.0kts

When the value is set as shown in the figure ①:

The minimum and maximum (min-max) are displayed on the left side and the unit is also

displayed if present.

② 0.0-100.0kts

To increase the value, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② (upward

triangle) with the trackball.

③ 0.0-100.0kts

With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, click the trackball section left button

once.

④ 0.0-100.0kts

The value will be increase in the minimum step.

⑤ To increase the value continuously:

Hold down th trackball section left button in the figure ③.

⑥ To decrease the value:

Move the arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure ②.

The following procedures are the same as for increasing.

10.0

10.1

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-38

３

[Ⅳ] Changing the Setting of Pull-down Menu

This method is used when a number of items have alternative selections of ON and OF in

one menu. (In this case, only one item is presented.)

① N A V L I N E

The status in the figure ① means that the item is OFF.

② N A V L I N E

Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② withe the trackball.

③ N A V L I N E

With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, press the trackball section left

button.

④ N A V L I N E

A check mark will appear in the checkbox and the funcrion will be turned on.

⑤ To turn off the function:

With the checkbox and arrow cursor position as shown in the fibure ④, press the

trackball section left button.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-39

３

[Ⅴ] Switch Type

This method is used, for example, in switching the current menu to the next.

①

A menu has an item as presented in the figure ①.

②

Move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure ② with the trackball.

③

With the arrow cursor over , press the trackball section left

button

.

④ The Sub1 Menu will appear.

＊ In some selections of this type, the key color will change in the step ② entering a

certain mode.

To reset the setting, select the same item again.

Example: Select NAV/MAP INFO Menu "SHIFT".

NAV SHIFT mode

SUB1 MENU

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-40

３

[Ⅵ] Vertical Scroll Type

The display is scrolled vertically.

This method is mainly used for functions such as display of a stored file

.

①

＊＊＊＊ ▲

＊＊＊

＊＊

・

▼

The vertical scrollbar is provided in a menu as shown in the figure ①.

②

＊＊＊＊ ▲

＊＊＊

＊＊

・

▼

When scrolling the display, move the arrow cursor to the position in the figure (upward

triangle) with the trackball.

③

＊＊＊＊ ▲

＊＊＊

＊＊

・

▼

With the arrow cursor on the position in the figure ②, click the trackball section left

button.

④

＊＊＊ ▲

＊＊

＊＊＊＊＊＊

・

▼

⑤ To scroll continuously the display upward:

Hold down the trackball section left button on the trackball in the figure ③.

⑥ To scroll the display downward:

Move teh arrow cursor to the downward triangle in the figure ②.

The following procedures are the same as for the upward scroll.

Scroll to the

Upper item.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-41

３

Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines)･･･････････････････････

The EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) are indispensable to measure distances and bearings of

targets.

Before operation, the operator must become familiar with the operation of EBLs.

EBL1 Operation

If EBL2 is selected, press to select EBL1 before operation. (The currently selected EBL is

indicated by selected characters in the lower right of the radar display.)

1

EBL1 will be displayed

in reverse video.

EBL1 will disappear.

Press

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-42

３

EBL2 Operation

I

f EBL1 is selected, press to select EBL2 before operation. (The currently selected EBL

is

indicated by characters in the lower right of the radar display.)

1

EBL Bearing Display

The bearing values of EBL1 and EBLL2 currently displayed within the PPI video

are indicated at the lower right of the radar display. For the currently operable

EBL, the characters EBL1 or EBL2 are displayed in reverse video.

Starting Point of EBL

The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be changed over to the

center of the radar display (CENTER) or to any offset position (OFFSET).

Note: For OFFSET of the EBL’s starting point, it is possible to determine whether the

starting point is fixed at the specific latitude and longitude.

EBL2 will be displayed

in reverse video.

EBL2 will disappear.

Press

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-43

３

Set Floating EBL･････････････････････････････････････････

To offset the starting point of EBL1 during its operation:

EBL1 T0370°C

Click the right figure C.

・Use the trackball to move the starting point of "EBL1".

・The starting point can be fixed by clicking the left trackball button.

When adjusting from the menu,

[Ⅰ] Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

Click “5.EBL1”.

“OFFSET”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

Move the starting point of EBL1 with the trackball.

Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point

of EBL1.

To reset the starting point of EBL1 to the center of the radar

display.

Click “5.EBL1”.

“CENTER”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

Click 0.EBL .

The Main Menu will be closed.

[Ⅱ] Continue to press also allow you to set the starting point of EBL1.

Continue to press . “OFFSET”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

Continue to press .

“CENTER”in“5.EBL1”will be set.

Note:For OFFSET of the EBL's starting point, it is possible to determine whether the

starting point is fixed at specific latitude and longitude.

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TUNE

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

CODE INPUT

7.

8.

9.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-44

３

To offset the starting point of EBL2 during its operation:

[Ⅰ] Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

Click “6.EBL2”.

“OFFSET”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

Move the starting point of EBL2 with the trackball.

Click the trackball section left button to fix the starting point

of EBL2.

To reset the starting point of EBL2 to the center of the radar

display.

Click “6.EBL2”.

“CENTER”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

Click 0.EBL .

The Main Menu will be closed.

[Ⅱ] Continue to press also allow you to set the starting point of EBL2.

Continue to press . “OFFSET”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

Continue to press .

“CENTER”in“6.EBL2”will be set.

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TGT ENH

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

CODE INPUT

7.

8.

9.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-45

３

Set Floating EBL････････････････････････････････････････

When this function is turned on and the starting point of EBL is moved to a position, the starting

point can be fixed at the latitude and longitude of that position. This function is effective when the

bearing from a certain point is repeatedly measured.

With this function OFF, the starting point of EBL is pasted on the radar display. When own ship is

moved, the starting point will remain at the same point on the display.

1 Select in the following order:

"MENU","MENU","SETTING1","SETTING2".

The SETTING2 Menu will appear.

2 Click EBL OFFSET ORIGIN.

The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN menu will appear.

[I] Setting the Mode when the EBL1 Starting Point is Moved

1 Perform the operating procedure 1 .

The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear.

“EBL1 L/L FIX” is set to the initial mode “OFF”.

When the EBL1 starting point is moved, the

starting point of EBL1 will remain at the set

position on the radar display.

2 Select the "ON" radio button.

“EBL1 L/L FIX” will switch from “OFF” to “ON”.

When the EBL1 starting point is moved to

another position, the starting point of EBL1 will

be fixed at the latitude and longitude on that

position.

3 Select "OFF".

Place the cursor over the "OFF" radio button,

and left-click.

Procedures

SETTING2

1.EBL1 L/L FIX

2.EBL2 L/L FIX

０．

EXIT

OFF ON

OFF

ON

EBL OFFSET ORIGIN

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-46

３

[II] Setting the Mode when the EBL2 Starting Point is Moved

1 Perform the operating procedure 1

and 2.

The EBL OFFSET ORIGIN Menu will appear.

“EBL2 L/L FIX” is set to the initial mode “OFF”.

When the EBL2 starting point is moved, the

starting point of EBL2 will remain at the set

position on the radar display.

2 Select the "ON" radio button.

“EBL2 L/L FIX” will switch from “OFF” to “ON”.

When the EBL2 starting point is moved to another

position, the starting point of EBL2 will be fixed at

the latitude and longitude on that position.

3 Left-click the "OFF" radio button.

The setting will switch from “ON” to “OFF”.

1 Click EXIT .

The SETTING2 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The SETTING2 Menu will be closed.

Notes • The course data and the own ship’s latitude and longitude data are required

to activate this function.

• With this function ON, the starting point will be returned to the center if the

starting point of EBL is moved to outside the radar display.

Exit

SETTING2

1.EBL1 L/L FIX

2.EBL2 L/L FIX

０．

EXIT

OFF ON

OFF

ON

EBL OFFSET ORIGIN

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-47

３

Select Range [RANGE]･･･････････････････････････････････

Any range scale is selectable from 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, and 96 (or 120)

nautical

miles. Pressing decreases the range and pressing increases the range in each

step. The selected range scale is indicated at the upper left of the display together with the range

ring interval with it.

Set Maximum Range･･････････････････････････････････････

The maximum range available may be set to 96nm or 120nm.

1 Select in the following order:

"MENU","MENU","1.SETTING1".

The SETTING1 menu will appear.

2 Select radio button of "8.RANGE

SELECT".

Each time this switch is pressed, the

maximum range is changed between 96 nm or

120 nm.

Note: When the maximum range is set to 120nm, the next

range of 48nm is 120nm and so the range of 96nm

cannot be selected.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

－

12

＋

2

Procedures

Exit

Range scale (NM)

Range marker (NM)

SUB1 MENU

1.SET GYRO

2.SELECT SPEED

０．

EXIT

0.0-359.9゜

SETTING1

0.0

SET MANUAL SPEED

2.1AXIS

3.

SELECT NAV

4.

SET/DRIFT

5.

TIME/DAY

6.

7.PRF

2.HIGH

8.RANGE SELECT

96nm 120nm

9.

SETTING2

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-48

３

Select Pulse Length･･････････････････････････････････････

Place the cursor over the SP , and left-click.

The transmission pulse length can be changed over in three levels (『 SP』, 『 MP』, and

『 LP』) every time the [PL] switch is pressed. The selected pulse length is indicated at the

upper left of the radar display. The pulse length can be changed only when the range is set to one

of 0.75, 1.5, 3, and 6 and 12NM. If 『 SP』 is selected, the range resolution increases, making

small targets clearer. If 『 LP』 is selected, the range resolution decreases, but the sensitivity

increases, making small targets larger with higher definition.

Select Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]･･････････････････

The bearing presentation mode is changed over in the order of [NORTH UP] (true bearing), [HEAD

UP] (relative bearing), and [COURSE UP] (course-up bearing) mode every time the [AZI MODE]

switch is pressed. When the currently selected mode is North-up or Course-up, it will be changed

over to Head-up by pressing this switch, and to another mode by pressing this switch once again.

(Example) RM H UP→PM N UP→RM C UP→RM H UP

H UP

N UP

C UP

The Bearing Mode [NORTH UP]

The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0° on range rings) points to the

due north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on a chart, and the

true bearing of a target can readily be read out.

Relative Bearing Mode [HEAD UP]

The video is displayed so that the ship’s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI

(0° on range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the

ship’s heading line, the operator can watch the video in the same field of view as in

operating the ship at sea.

This mode is suitable for ocean sailing and for watching over other ships.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-49

３

Course-Up Mode [COURSE UP]

By pressing this switch, the ship’s heading line is fixed pointing to the zenith of the

PPI (0° on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets do

not flicker, but are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading

line varies by the same shift of own ship’s course. If the course is changed, the

heading line can be reset to the Course-up mode by pressing the switch several

times.

Cancel Ship’s Heading Line [HL OFF]･･････････････････････

HL OFF

The ship’s heading line (HL) that presents the course of own ship is always displayed on the radar

display. The heading line is canceled while this switch is being pressed, so that the targets on the

heading lines can be seen easily.

Cancel All Display Items Except HL and Cross Cursor Mark

[+] [DATA OFF]･･･････････････････････････････････････････

All display information such ARPA vectors, symbols and navigation data may be cancelled

temporarily by the following operations, except VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark [＋] and range

rings.

1 Click MENU on the screen.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

North

North-up Mode Head-up Mode Course-up Mode

Procedures

H L

OFF

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-50

３

2 Click DATA OFF .

All the display items except radar display,

VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark [＋] and

range rings will disappear from the radar

display.

1 Click DATA OFF .

7.DATA OFF will be reset and, the

information temporarily cancelled will

reappear.

1 Click EXIT .

The Main Menu will be closed.

Display PI（Parallel Index Lines ）[PI]･･････････････････････

Parallel index lines can be displayed in a semicircular area.

1 Click the PI on the screen.

The PI Menu will appear.

2 Select "ON" radio button of "1.IR".

“ON” in “1.MODE” will be set and parallel

index lines will appear on the radar display.

The direction of PI will be changed by rotating

the [EBL] control, and the line intervals will be

changed by rotating the [VRM] control.

1 Select “OFF” of “1.MODE”.

“OFF” in “1.MODE” will be set and the PI will

disappear on the radar display.

1 Click EXIT .

The PI Menu will be closed.

Cancellation

Exit

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TUNE

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

CODE INPUT

7.

8.

9.

Procedures

Cancellation

Exit

PI

1.MODE

0.

OFF ON

PI

INTERVAL

EXIT

* * . *

* * . * °

nm

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-51

３

Note: The bearing of the parallel index lines that are displayed in the PI menu

represents the true value when the bearing display of the radar reads N UP or C

UP and the relative value when it reads H UP.

Operation of Parallel Index Lines

◎ Rotate the PL (Parallel Index Lines) in the same direction of rotating the [EBL] control

(① and ②).

◎ The interval of the PI can be decreased as The [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise

(③ and increased as the [VRM] control is rotated anticlockwise (④).

◎ The rotation and interval of the PI are controlled effectively only from the PI Menu.

When the PI Menu is closed, the parallel index lines are fixed.

◎ Repeat the above procedures from the first step to move the PI again.

◎ Click PI , and the PI Menu will be closed and the PI will be fixed.

Press any of , , , and .

The PI will be fixed and the I Menu will be closed.

Display of Parallel Index Lines

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-52

３

Change Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode

1 Click the RM button on the upper left of the screen.

The Relative Motion mode is changed to the True Motion mode. In the True

Motion mode, the position of own ship on the display moves depending upon

its course and speed and the influence of the current. Land and other fixed

ranges are fixed on the display and only actually moving targets move on the

radar display. When the True Motion mode is selected, own ship’s position

will be set to about 66% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its

course allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship will start moving

depending upon its course and speed and the influence of the tide.

Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the position of about 66% of the

display radius, the ship will be automatically reset to its initial position at about

65% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the

influence of the current.

Change True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode.

1 Click the TM button on the upper left of the screen.

The True Motion mode is dhange to the Relative Motion mode.

One ship nrill be reset to center position.

Procedures

Fixed on the radar displa

y

Moving depending on own ship’s speed

True Motion Display

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-53

３

Move Own Ship’s Display Position [OFF CENTER]･･････････

Own ship’s position at the display center can be moved to an off-centered position within 66% of the

display radius. This function is convenient to observe a wide coverage in any direction.

When the range is 96 (or 120)NM, this function cannot be used.

1 Click the on the upper right of the screen.

The bold cross cursor mark [+] will appear at the position of own ship on the

radar display.

2 Move the cross cursor mark [+] (own ship’s position) to

another position with the trackball.

3 Press the left button of the trackball.

The own ship’s position will move to the position of the cross cursor mark [+],

where it will be fixed.

Return Own Ship’s Position to the Center

1 Click the on the upper right of the screen.

Procedures

Press the left button of the

trackball .

Procedures

OFF

CENTER

OFF

CENTER

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-54

３

Display Other Ship’s Trails [TRAILS]･･･････････････････････

Other ship’s movement and speed can be monitored from the length and direction of its trail, serving

for collision avoidance. The trail length can be changed over 4 levels of 0.5 min, 1 min, 3 min, and

6 min.

Click OFF

Click 0.5min

Click 1min

Click 3min

Click 6min

Trail

Other ship

The level 0.5min will be selected and “TRAIL 0.5min”

will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (of 0.5 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

The level 1min will be selected and “TRAIL 1min” will appear at

the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (of 1 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

The level 3min will be selected and “TRAIL 3min” will appear at

the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (of 3 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

The level 6min will be selected and “TRAIL 6min” will appear at

the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (of 6 min long) will appear after other ship’s symbols.

“TRAIL OFF” will appear at the lower left of the radar display and

the trails of other ships will disappear.

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-55

３

①

Display Own Ship’s Tracks and Own Symbols [OWN TRACK]

In the case that Any Navigation Equipment is Connected to This System

When navigation equipment is connected, the own ship’s track data of up to 1024 points that is

sent from the equipment can be stored and displayed. The data storage interval can be set

over 4 levels, 3 minutes (distance that the own ship moves within 3 minutes), 10 minutes, 15

minutes, and 30 minutes.

The setting can be changed by

left-clicking the button on the lower left

of the screen (right figure①).

○ When setting from the mune:

1 Click the MENU button on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click TRACK .

The TRACK Menu will appear.

4 Select "ON" radio button of "1.IR".

“ON”in“1.TRACK”will be set and own ship's

past track originated its current position will

appear. The current storage time interval will

appear at lower left on the radar display.

1 Select "OFF" radio button of "1.IR".

“OFF”in“1.TRACK”will be set and own ship's track and the storage time interval

will disappear.

Procedures

Cancellation

AUTO

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

T

GAIN

SUB1 MENU

1.TRACK

2.INTERVAL TIME

0．

EXIT

OFF ON

TRACK

1. 3min

3. CLR ALL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-56

３

In Case of Changing Storage Time Interval

1 Repeat the above procedure up to

Step 3.

2 Click INTERVAL .

2.INTERVAL TIME will be selected and the

pull-down menu will appear.

3 Select the interval time in the

pull-down menu, select 1 through

4 with the trackball, then left-click.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

SUB1 MENU

1.TRACK

2.INTERVAL TIME

0．

EXIT

OFF ON

TRACK

1. 3min

3. CLR ALL

1. 3min

2. 10min

3. 15min

4. 30min

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-57

３

Clear Own Ship’s Track Storage

1 Repeat the procedures of changing storage time interval of

own ship up to step 1.

2 Click CLR ALL .

CLR ALL will be selected. When clearing all

the past track, click 1.YES to the question

“CLR ALL OK?”. If 2.NO is clicked, all the

track will be cleared.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

SUB1 MENU

1.TRACK

2.INTERVAL TIME

0．

EXIT

OFF ON

TRACK

1. 3min

3. CLR ALL

CLR ALL OK?

1.

YES

2.

NO

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-58

３

Marking [MARK]･････････････････････････････････････････

A maximum of 20 marks can be displayed at arbitrary positions on the radar video.

A mark created on the display holds the latitude and longitude.

①

[I] Plotting Marks. CURSOR( )

1 Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen

(right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".

MARK will appear in the CURSOR（） at the upper left of the radar display.

2 Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [□]

mark is inserted.

3 Press trackball section left button.

The cross cursor mark [ + ] will be changed into the [□] mark and fixed on the

radar display. When entering more [□] marks, repeat the procedures from step

2. Up to 20 marks can be entered.

Note: If more than 20 marks are created, the oldest mark is cleared and the newly

created mark is displayed.

①

[II] Clearing Marks CURSOR( )

1 Place the cursor over the upper right section of the screen

(right figure), then right-click. Next, select "MARK".

MARK is displayed on CURSOR（） at the upper right of the radar display.

2 Put the cross cursor mark [ + ] on the position where the [□]

mark is inserted.

3 Press trackball section right button.

The [□] mark will disappear. When clearing another [□] mark, repeat the

procedure from step 2.

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-59

３

Display Range Rings [RANGE RINGS]････････････････････

The range rings will appear.

1 Press the switch section (section

indicated by the arrow in the right

figure) of the fixed distance scale on the

upper left of the screen.

The range rings will appear and the interval of

the range rings will be digitally indicated at the

upper left of the radar display.

1 When the fixed distance scale is displayed, press the switch

on the right figure.

The range rings will disappear.

Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2]･････････････

This function is to display and set up variable range marks (VRMs). Two VRMs are available.

VRM1 is represented as a broken line and VRM2 as a dotted line. When EBL1 is displayed, VRM1

marker appears on the EBL1. When EBL2 is displayed, VRM2 marker appears on the EBL2. If

the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of a VRM marker is positioned at the starting point of

the EBL.

VRM markers presented on EBL

●

Mark: VRM1

○

Mark: VRM2

Procedures

Cancellation

－＋

6

１

RM HUP

VRM1

VRM2

EBL1

EBL2

EBL1,VRM1:

EBL2,VRM2:

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-60

３

VRM1 Operation

If VRM2 is selected, press to select VRM1 before operation.

(The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar

display.)

1 Press

VRM2 Operation

If VRM1 is selected, press to select VRM2 before operation.

(The currently selected VRM is displayed in reverse video at the lower right of the radar

display.)

1 Press

VRM Range Display

The values of the VRM1 and VRM2 that are currently displayed on the PPI will be

indicated on the lower left of the radar display.

The VRM1 or VRM2 that is currently operable will be selected close to its range value.

VRM Operation

The variable range markers are displayed centering on the own ship. When rotating the

[VRM] control clockwise, the VRM will be larger. When rotating the [VRM] control

counterclockwise, the VRM will be smaller.

VRM1 will be selected.

VRM1 will disappear.

Press

Procedures

VRM2 will be selected.

VRM2 will disappear.

Press

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-61

３

Set Guard Zones [GUARD ZONE]･･････････････････････････

A fan-shape guard zone can be set up to keep a watch over the intrusion of other ships or targets, or

to automatically acquire other ships that have intruded into the zone.

By left-clicking the "GZ1, 2" section on the screen, it is possible to set on or off.

In this case, the zone that was set the previous time will be turned on.

[I] Creation of Fan-shaped Guard zone

1 Click GZ .

The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear.

2 Select “ON” of “GUARD ZONE1” to

create a guard zone 1 and “GUARD

ZONE2” to create a guard zone 2.

When Guard Zone 1 and 2 are set, “ON” will

set.

3 Click MAKE GZ1 to create GUARD

ZONE1.

4 Click MAKE GZ2 to create GUARD

ZONE2.

The cursor will move to the echo display

section.

Note: Guard Zones 1 or 2 can be set in any area within a range of 0.5 to 32

NM.

5 Use the [VRM] and [EBL] knobs to place VRM and EBL over

the starting point of the guard zone, then left click the cursor.

The starting point of the guard zone will be set.

6 Move the EBL to make fan-shaped zone enclosed by the

current cross cursor position.

Left-click when a desired guard zone is made.

The shape of the guard zone will be set up.

(The width of a guard zone is fixed to 0.5NM).

Procedures

GUARD ZONE

1.GUARD ZONE1(GZ1)

MAKE GZ1

０．

EXIT

OFF ON

OFF

ON

3.

4.

MAKE GZ2

5.SET ACQ AUTO KEY

2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)

(0.5NM-32NM)

1.GZ1

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-62

３

1 Click EXIT or GZ .

The Guard Zone Menu will be closed.

Operation of Guard Zones

When a target appears within a fan-shaped guard zone, an alarm will sound and a mark

▽ will appear on the target. The track mode becomes effective after about 1 min.

In creating a guard zone, a circular guard ring may be created if the start and end points

of the guard zone are set to the same point by omitting step 5 above.

The guard zone is displayed only during radar transmission, but also not appear during

the standby operation.

[II] Clearing Guard Zones from Radar Display

Left-click the switch "GZ1, 2" on the screen and the guard zone.

○To turn this off from the menu,

1 Execute the procedures for [Ⅰ]

Creation of Fan-shaped Guard

Zone up to step 2.

The GUARD ZONE Menu will appear.

2 Press 1 to clear Guard Zone 1

from radar display, and press 2 to

clear Guard Zone 2.

“OFF”will be set for Guard Zone 1 or 2,

which will be cleared from radar display.

1 Execute the Exit step in the same

procedures for [Ⅰ] Creation of

Fan-shaped Guard Zone.

Check with the first [ENT] key.

Check with the second [ENT] key.

Exit

Procedures

Exit

GUARD ZONE

1.GUARD ZONE1(GZ1)

MAKE GZ1

０．

EXIT

OFF ON

OFF

ON

3.

4.

MAKE GZ2

2.GUARD ZONE2(GZ2)

(0.5NM-32NM)

HL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-63

３

Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]････････････････････････

ALARM ACK is the function of acknowledging the alarm item when an alarm sounds and stopping

an alarm sound as well as canceling flickering display. (If there are two or more alarms, it is

necessary to operate the switch for each alarm indication.) The alarm sound can be stopped, but

the alarm indication is not cancelled.

Stopping Alarm Sound

1 Press .

Or left-click the alarm display area on the screen.

The alarm sound will be stopped.

Set Alarm Sound Level･･･････････････････････････････････

This function sets the sound and volume level of the alarm (alarm sound) to be delivered from the

keyboard.

Setting Alarm Sound level

1 Click the MENU on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click LEVEL .

The LEVEL Menu will be selected.

4 Click BUZZER .

5.BUZZER will be selected and the pull-down

menu will appear.

5 Select any level from 1 to 7 for

BUZZER volume level in the

pull-down and click it.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

2.VRM

０．

EXIT

3.EBL

4.CHARACTER

5.VIDEO(ECHO)

6.ARPA

7.BUZZER

LEVEL

1.RANGE RINGS

7.LEVEL7

4.LEVEL4

1.LEVEL1

2.LEVEL2

3.LEVEL3

4.LEVEL4

5.LEVEL4

5.LEVEL5

6.LEVEL6

7.LEVEL7

ALARM

ACK

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-64

３

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Note: Changing the “LEVEL”of the buzzer will cause the levels of all the

alarms to be changed as well as the key touch sound.

The level of any alarm cannot be set to 0 as well as the key touch

sound.

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-65

３

FUNCTION･･･････････････････････････････････････････････

FUNCTION is a function of setting the process suited for each condition during navigation to

enhance the target detection performance.

Setting items: The following nodes can be switched over.

FUNC1: Effective in observing the echoes on short ranges.

FUNC2: Effective in observing the echoes on long ranges.

FUNC3: Effective in observing the echoes in rough weather.

FUNC4: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.

FUNC5: Set by service personnel. The initial setting is the same as FUNC1.

1 Click the MENU on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click FUNCTION.

4.FUNCTION will be selected and the

pull-down menu will appear.

3 Select a desired process setting

item from the click.

The process setting item will be changed and

the current setting state will appear at the

lower

right of the radar display.

4 For changing the setting item, open

the pull-down menu in step 2 above

again and select a desired process

setting item.

1 Click EXIT .

The Main Menu will be closed.

1 Execute the procedures to function up to step 2.

4.FUNCTION will be selected and the pull-down menu will appear.

2 Click EXIT .

1.FUNC OFF will be set and “FUNC OFF” will appear the lower right of the

radar display.

Procedures

Cancellation

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TGT ENH

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

DEGAUSS

7.

8.

9.

1.FUNC OFF

2.FUNC1

3.FUNC2

4.FUNC3

5.FUNC4

6.FUNC5

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-66

３

The process setting items of FUNC4 and FUNC5 can be changed by service personnel.

• Setting gain of input target signal (sensitivity preset)

• Setting standard value of input target signal (noise level)

• Setting radar interference rejection (IR):IR1 to IR4 (Effective when IR is ON)

• Setting target enhancement (TGT ENH):EXP1 to EXP4 (Effective when TGT ENH is

ON)

• Setting target processing (PROCESS):MODE1 to MODE8 (Effective when PROCESS

is ON)

• Setting sensitivity range (Maximum and minimum values)

• Setting sea clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values)

• Setting rain/snow clutter suppression range (Maximum and minimum values)

Note: Do not use FUNC2 and FUNC3 on short ranges. Otherwise, detection of ship targets

moving high speeds may become poor.

For FUNC1 to FUNC3, the recommended parameters have been preset by the

manufacturer, but the preset parameters could no be changed after delivery. In using

FUNC1 to FUNC3, IR, TGT ENH and PROCESS shall be set to ON (PROC1 to PROC3).

Expand Targets･･････････････････････････････････････････

Targets displayed on the radar display can be expanded, regardless of the pulse length selected.

The "ENH" section at the button left

of the screen can be clicked to

change the ON/OFF setting.

1 Click MENU.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Select "ON" radio button of

TGT ENH .

“ON”in“2TGT ENH”will be set and“ENH

ON ”will appear at the lower left of the radar

display.

Then, the targets on the radar display will be

expanded for higher definition.

1 Click MENU.

2 Select "ON" radio button of TGT ENH.

“OFF” in “2.TGT ENH” will be set and “ENH OFF” will appear at the lower left

of the radar display.

The expanded targets on the radar display will be reset to their original sizes.

1 Click EXIT .

The Main Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Cancellation

Exit

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TGT ENH

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

CODE INPUT

7.

8.

9.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-67

３

 In watching a radar beacon mark, SART signal or a fast moving target on the

radar display, set the system to : PROCESS OFF (Processed Video OFF).

 It is most suitable to use this function in the TM mode.

In using this function in the RM mode, use it in the NORTH UP or COURSE UP

mode. In using the function in the HEAD UP mode, the video may be blurred.

Display Processed Videos････････････････････････････････

Unnecessary noise will be reduced to highlight targets.

Clicking "PROC" on the screen will change the setting.

○ When setting from the menu:

1 Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click the setting section of

“3.PROCESS”.

3.PROCESS will be selected and the

pull-down menu will appear.

3 Click a setting from 1 to 4.

3-1 When “2.PROC1” is selected.

2.PROC1 will be set and the targets moving

at high speeds will be selected.

The targets moving at low speeds will be

darkened.

This function is recommendable on the radar

ranges of 1.5 NM or less.

3-2 When “3.PROC2” is selected.

3.PROC2 will be set.

This processing speed is in a range between PROC1 and PROC3.

3-3 When“4.PROC3” is selected.

4.PROC3 will be set and the targets moving at low speeds will be selected.

The targets moving at high speeds will be darkened.

This function is recommendable on the radar ranges of 3 NM

or more.

Attention

Procedures

MAIN MENU

1.IR

CENTER

2.TGT ENH

０．

EXIT

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

3.PROCESS

2.PROC1

4.FUNCTION

1.FUNC OFF

5.EBL1

OFFSET

6.EBL2

CENTER

OFFSET

DATA OFF

SUB1 MENU

DEGAUSS

7.

8.

9.

2.PROC1

3.PROC2

4.PROC3

1.OFF

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-68

３

 In watching a radar mark or SART signal on the radar display, set the system to:

IR OFF (Radar Interference Rejection OFF)

1 Execute the procedures to display processed videos up to

step 2.

2 Click OFF .

1.OFF will be set.

1 Click EXIT .

The Main Menu will be closed.

Reduce Radar Interference････････････････････････････････

This function is used when the interference from other ship's radar is strong.

By left-clicking the button on the lower right of the screen,

it is possible to set on or off.

1 Click MENU.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click "ON" radio button of IR .

“ON” in “1.IR” will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to ON to

reduce radar interference.

1 Click MENU.

2 Click "OFF" radio button of IR .

“OFF” in “1.IR” will be set and the radar interference rejection will be set to

OFF.

1 Click EXIT .

The Main Menu will be closed.

Cancellation

Exit

Attention

Procedures

Cancellation

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-69

３

Personal Information･････････････････････････････････････

The operating status of the radar equipment is recorded. If there are two or more operators to

operate the radar, each operator can register and recall the operating status that is suitable for the

operator. The operating status for up to 5 operators and each status can be named (using a

maximum of 10 alphanumeric characters).

* Personal Data to be Stored:

• Bearing mode

• DAY/NIGHT mode setting

• Brilliance

• Alarm level

• Vector length/mode

• Various video processing methods (IR, ENH, PROC, and FUNC)

Recalling Operating Status

Click the "PIN " on the lower right of the screen.

Open the LOAD menu. Execute the procedure from step 5.

1 Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click PIN .

The PIN Menu will appear.

4 Click LOAD .

The PIN Menu will appear.

5 Select any number on the LOAD

Menu and click any of 1 to 5.

The registered operating status will be

recalled.

6 Click 1.YES to the question “FILE ERASE OK?” to recall the

registered operating status.

Click 2.NO to stop the recall.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

LOAD

SAVE

ERASE

2.

3.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-70

３

1 Click EXIT .

The PIN Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Registering Operating Status

1 Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to

step 3.

2 Click SAVE .

The SAVE Menu will appear.

3 Click any of 1 to 5 to save the

operating status item assigned by

any number 1 to 5.

The INPUT NME Menu will appear and the

selected number to save will be set up.

4 Use the trackball to select an

alphabet character from A to Z that

is displayed in the menu, press the

left trackball button, and input one

character or one number of the

name used for saving.

A maximum of 10 characters can be entered.

5 Repeat step 4 until the name to save is made up, and select

“ENTER” in INPUT NAME Menu by using the trackball and

click the trackball section left button.

The operating status will be saved.

Exit

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

LOAD

TOKYO

2.

3.

* * * * * * * * * *

4.

5.

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

SAVE

TOKYO

2.

3.

INPUT NAME

4.

5.

* * * * * * * * * *

1234567809

ABCDEFGH I J

KLMNOPQRST

UVWXYZ < >

D E L B S

ENTER

USE TB&NUM

EXIT :

PRESS

EXIT OR [CLR]

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-71

３

1 Click EXIT .

The PIN will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Canceling Registered Operating Status

1 Execute the procedures to recalling operating status up to

step 3.

2 Click ERASE .

The ERASE Menu will appear.

3 Click any of 1 to 5.

The register number of the operating status to

erased will be selected.

4 Click YES to the question “FILE

ERASE OK?” to erase the

registered number.

Click NO to stop the erasing.

1 Click EXIT .

The PIN Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

3 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Exit

Procedures

Exit

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

ERASE

TOKYO

2.

3.

* * * * * * * * * *

4.

5.

FILE ERASE OK?

1.

Y E S N O2.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-72

３

SUB1 MENU

1.WPT

2.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

0

NAV/MAP

3.

OFF ON

NAV DISP

4.GEODETIC

WGS-84

Display of Navigational Information････････････････････････

Navigational information such as waypoint marks, and a maximum of 256 point of NAV lines,

coastlines, depth contours and NAV marks can be created, displayed, read out, saved, edited

and cancelled. (This function is effective only when navigation equipment is connected to this

system.)

[I] Displaying Waypoint Marks

If waypoint information is sent from navigation equipment, a waypoint mark will appear on the

radar display. If the waypoint appears within the radar display, it is displayed as “○WP”.

1 Click the MENU on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click NAV/MAP INFO .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

4 Click "ON" radio button of WPT .

“ON” in 1.WPT will be set and the selected

waypoint mark will appear.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

Geodetic system name display

area: The display changes

according to the geodetic

system No. in the right input

area.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-73

３

[II] Setting NAV INFO to ON/OFF

The following navigational information can be displayed or cancelled by pressing the

corresponding switch.

 Own ship mark [OS MARK]

 NAV lines [NAV LINE]

 Coast lines [COAST]

 Depth contour [CONTOUR]

 Mark 1 [MARK1]

 Mark 2 [MARK2]

 Mark 3 [MARK3]

 Mark 4 [MARK4]

1 Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click NAV/MAP INFO .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

4 Click NAV DISP .

The NAV DISP Menu will appear.

5 Click the check box next to the

numbers 1 though 8 that are to be

turned ON or OFF.

The menu item set to ON will be marked with

a check mark in the “□”.

1 Click EXIT .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

SUB1 MENU

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV DISP

1.OS MARK

2.NAV LINE

3.COAST

4.CONTOUR

5.MARK1

6.MARK2

7.MARK3

8.MARK4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-74

３

[III] Making and Editing Navigation Information

1 Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click NAV/MAP INFO .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

4 Click NAV/MAP .

The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.

5 Click EDIT .

The EDIT Menu will appear.

Note: Latitude and longitude data from the GPS and bearing data

from the GYRO are required.

Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display

Make up navigational information

Correct one point in navigational information

Delete one point navigational information

Insert one element of NAV line, Coast line or Depth

Contour

Remain points of navigational information that can be

created

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

EDIT

2.

3.

CLEAR

MAKE

4.

5.

CORRECT

DELETE

INSERT

REMAIN POINT

256

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-75

３

１ CLEAR (Clear all NAV INFO or each NAV item on display)

1 Click CLEAR .

The CLEAR Menu will appear.

2 Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.

1 : Clear all navigational information on display.

2 : Clear NAV LINE.

3 : Clear COAST Line.

4 : Clear CONTOUR.

5 : Clear MARK1.

6 : Clear MARK2.

7 : Clear MARK3.

8 : Clear MARK4.

The NAV INFO to be cleared will be selected.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

EDIT

2.

3.

CLEAR

ALL

4.

5.

NAV LINE

COAST

CONTOUR

MARK1

MARK2

MARK3

MARK4

6.

7.

8.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-76

３

2 MAKE (Make up navigational information)

1 Click MAKE .

The MAKE Menu will appear.

2 Press any of 1 to 8 to clear any item navigation information.

1 : Make NAV LINE.

2 : Make COAST Line.

3 : Make CONTOUR.

4 : Make MARK1.

5 : Make MARK2.

6 : Make MARK3.

7 : Make MARK4.

When one of 1 to 7 is selected, NAV MAKE will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at

the upper right of the radar display.

3 Move the cross cursor mark to the starting point of a line or

any element of a mark using the trackball, and click the

trackball section left button.

The starting point of a line or the element of a mark to mark will be set up.

4 Repeat step 3 above. If a line or mark is completed, click the

ENT .

Then, a line or a mark will be made.

5 Repeat the steps 2 to 4 to make another line or mark.

6 Click EXIT when all NAV INFO item is made.

The EDIT Menu will reappear.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

EDIT

2.

3.

MAKE

NAV LINE

4.

5.

COAST

CONTOUR

MARK1

MARK2

MARK3

MARK4

ENT

6.

7.

8.

REMAIN POINT

256

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-77

３

Note: Navigation information can have a maximum of 256 points

plotted. Note that the value of REMAIN POINTS (the number

of points that can be still plotted) is decreased whenever

lines and marks are plotted.

3 CORRECT (Correct one position of navigational information)

1 Click CORRECT .

CORRECT will be selected. CORRECT will

appear in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of

the radar display.

2 Move the cross cursor mark to any

line element or mark to correct using

the trackball, and click the trackball

section left button.

A dotted-line starting from the line or mark will be

drawn as the cross cursor moves.

3 Move the cross cursor to the point to

correct using the trackball, and click

the trackball section left button.

One element of the line or the mark will be

moved.

4 DELETE (Delete one point in navigational

information)

1 Click DELETE .

DELETE will be selected. NAV DEL will appear

in the CURSOR( ) at the upper right of the radar

display.

2 Move the cross cursor mark to any

line element or mark to delete using

the trackball, and click the trackball

section left button.

One element of the line or the mark will be

deleted.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

EDIT

2.

3.

CLEAR

MAKE

4.

5.

CORRECT

DELETE

INSERT

REMAIN POINT

256

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

EDIT

2.

3.

CLEAR

MAKE

4.

5.

CORRECT

DELETE

INSERT

REMAIN POINT

256

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-78

３

(Example)

5 INSERT (Insert one element of NAV line, Coast line or Depth Contour)

1 Click INSERT .

INSERT will be selected. NAV INS will appear

in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the

radar display.

2 Move the cross cursor mark to any

line element to which another

element is to add, using the

trackball, and click the trackball

section left button.

3 Move the cross cursor to the point

at which another line element is to

be inserted, using the trackball, and

click the trackball section left

button.

One line element will be inserted.

(Example)

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

EDIT

2.

3.

CLEAR

MAKE

4.

5.

CORRECT

DELETE

INSERT

REMAIN POINT

256

①

②

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-79

３

6 EXIT (End making and editing navigational information)

1 Click EXIT .

The NAV/MAP Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.

3 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

4 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

[Ⅳ] Setting Navigational Information

1 Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click NAV/MAP INFO .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

4 Click NAV/MAP .

The NAV/MAP Menu will appear.

Exit

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-80

３

Enter own ship's position manually

Read out navigational information

Save navigational information

Erase saved navigational information

Make, cancel, add and move navigational

information

Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark

Clear shifted navigational positions

1 OS POSN (Enter own ship's position manually)

Set this function to use the navigational information at any other position than

own ship's position.

1 Click the latitude and longitude numeric section under

"OS POSN".

1.OS POSN will be selected.

The numeric input dialogue box will be displayed.

2 Press or .

N (north latitude) or S (south latitude) will be selected.

3 Enter a latitude value (XX゜XXX.XX’) using any of 0 to 9.

4 Press SET .

The latitude value entered manually will be set up.

5 Press or .

E (east longitude) or W (west longitude) will be selected.

SUB1 MENU

1.OS POSN

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

2.

3.

N　00' 00. 000'

LOAD

4.

5.

SAVE

ERASE

EDIT

W　00' 00. 000'

SHIFT

SHIFT CLEAR

6.

7.

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-81

３

6 Enter a longitude value (XX゜XXX.XX’) using any of 0 to 9.

7 Press SET .

The longitude value entered manually will be set up.

Note: The own ship's position entered manually is effective only in the NAV/MAP

INFO Menu.

2 Select Equipment to Load the Read-out Navigational Information

In the case that any electronic positioning equipment such as GPS is

connected to the system, or that own ship's position is entered manually, the

data can be read out.

1 Click LOAD .

The LOAD Menu will appear.

2 Click DEVICE .

1.DEVICE will be selected and the pull-down

menu will appear.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

2.

LOAD

LODE

1.DEVICE

1.INTERNAL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-82

３

3 Readout Navigational Information Display (Radar Internal Data)

Only when navigational equipment is connected to the system or when own

ship's position is entered manually, the readout files can be selected. The

selecting method is different depending upon the type of device to load the

readout data.

When Setting DEVICE to INTERNAL

1 Click LOAD .

The LOAD Menu will appear.

2 Place the cursor over the

navigation information file name

(0 through 9) to be read, then

double click.

3 Click YES to the question “FILE

LOAD OK?” if the file name is right.

The selected number of navigational

information will be read out.

To cancel file loading, click NO .

4 The selected file name will appear at the lower right of the

radar display.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

LOAD

LOAD DATA

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

0.

EXIT :

PRESS

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-83

３

4 SAVE (Save navigational information)

In the case that any electronic navigation equipment is connected to the system,

or that own ship's position is entered manually, the data can be saved.

1 Click SAVE .

The SAVE Menu will appear.

2 Place the cursor over one of the

numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all),

then click.

The INPUT NAME Menu will appear and the

selected number to save will be set up.

3 Use the trackball to select an

alphabet character from A to Z that

is displayed in the menu, press the

left trackball button, and input one

character or one number of the

name used for saving.

A maximum of 10 characters can be entered.

4 Repeat step 3 until the name to

save is made up, and select “ ENTER” in INPUT NAME

Menu by using the trackball and click the trackball section

left button.

The currently displayed navigational information will be saved.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

NAV/MAP

SAVE

TOKYO

2.

3.

* * * * *

INPUT NAME

4.

5.

* * * * * * * * * *

1234567809

ABCDEFGH I J

KLMNOPQRST

UVWXYZ

D E L B S

ENTER

USE TB&NUM

EXIT :

PRESS

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

6.

7.

8.

9.

EXIT :

PRESS

EXIT

0.

LR

SPC

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-84

３

5 ERASE (Erase saved navigational information)

1 Click ERASE .

The ERASE Menu will appear.

2 Place the cursor over one of the

numbers 1 through 0 (ten in all),

then click.

3 Click YES to the question “FILE

ERASE OK?” to erase the

information.

The elected number of navigational

information will be erased.

Click NO to stop erasing the information.

6 SHIFT (Shift navigational positions except own ship's mark)

The position of any navigational information

such as NAV lines, coast lines, depth

contours, and other marks except own ship's

mark can be corrected manually.

1 Click SHIFT .

SHIFT will be selected. NAV SHIFT will

appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right

of the radar display.

2 Move the cross cursor mark to an

element of a line such as NAV line,

coast line, depth contour line, or a

mark using the trackball.

3 Click the trackball section left

button.

A line or mark to correct will be set up.

4 Move the cross cursor mark to any point to which a line or

mark will be shifted, using the trackball.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.

NAV/MAP

ERASE

TOKYO

2.

3.

* * * * *

4.

5.

NAV/MAP INFO

6.

7.

8.

9.

EXIT :

PRESS

EXIT

0.

FILE ERASE OK?

1. 2.

Y E S N O

SUB1 MENU

1.OS POSN

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

NAV/MAP

2.

3.

N　00' 00. 000'

LOAD

4.

5.

SAVE

ERASE

EDIT

W　00' 00. 000'

SHIFT

SHIFT CLEAR

6.

7.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-85

３

5 Click the trackball section left button.

The point to which a line or mark is to be shifted will be set up, and all lines and

marks will be shifted.

7 SHIFT CLEAR (Clear the corrected positions of navigation information)

1 Click SHIFT CLEAR .

SHIFT CLEAR will be selected.

The latest correction to navigation information (only one correction) will be

cleared.

Note: Only the latest correction is cleared and the previous

navigation information is restored.

The information cannot be further restored.

8 EXIT (Exit from setting of navigational information)

1 Click EXIT .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

3 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-86

３

SUB1 MENU

1.WPT

2.

０．

EXIT

NAV/MAP INFO

0

NAV/MAP

3.

OFF ON

NAV DISP

4.GEODETIC

WGS-84

[Ⅴ] Setup and Display of Geodetic System

In making up any navigational information, it is necessary to set up the geodetic

system used by the connected navigation equipment. When any saved

navigational information is loaded, the geodetic system used when the

navigational information was saved will also be displayed. Then, check that the

geodetic system on display is the same as that for the connected navigation

equipment. If both geodetic systems are different, the positions of the

navigational information on radar display may be deviated. Therefore, it is

important to set the same geodetic system as the navigation equipment.

1 Click MENU .

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

3 Click NAV/MAP INFO .

The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

4 Click GEODETIC .

4.GEODETIC will be selected.

5 Select by pressing in the

menu.

This is set by or the numeric

input dialogue box.

Select the number of geodetic

system.

(See Table of Geodetic Systems)

When the number of geodetic system is

entered, its name is changed.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

Geodetic system name display

area: The display changes

according to the geodetic

system No. in the right input

area.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-87

３

TABLE OF GEODETIC SYSTEM

NO. NAME REPRESENTATION

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

WGS-84

WGS-72

Japan

North American 1927 (U.S)

North American 1927 (Canada & Alaska)

European 1950 (Europe)

Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)

Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England)

NAD-83

ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan)

ARC (Botswana)

AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia)

BERMUDA 1957 (the Bermudas)

BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Columbia)

CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine)

CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Island)

CHUA ASTRO (paraguay)

CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil)

DJAKARTA (VATAVIA)(Sumatra)

EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe)

GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand)

GUAM 1963 (Guam)

HAYFORD 1910 (Finland)

HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland)

INDIAN (India & Nepal)

IRELAND 1965 (Ireland)

KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia)

L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Black Island)

LIBERIA 1964 (Liberia)

LUZON (Philippines)

MERCHICH (Morocco)

MINNA (Cameroon)

NAHRWAN (Oman)

NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad and Tobago)

OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt)

OLD HAWAIIAN (the Hawaii Islands)

PICO DE LAS NIEVES (the Canary Islands)

PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America)

PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile)

PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands)

QORNOQ (South Greenland)

RT90 (Sweden)

SANTA BRAZ (Sao Maguel, santa Maria Islands)

SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South America)

SOUTHWEST BASE

(Faial, Graciosa, Pico.Sao Jorge and terceira Islands)

TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei and East Malaysia)

WGS-84

WGS-72

Japan

1927 North America

1927 Canada, Araska

European 1950

Austrarian geodetic 1966

UK

NAD-83

no use

ADINDAN

ARC 1950

AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984

BERMUDA 1957

BOGOTA OBSERVATORY

CAMPO INCHAUSPE

CHATHAM 1971

CHUA ASTRO

CORREGO ALEGRE

DJAKARTA

EUROPEAN 1979

GEODETIC DATUM 1949

GUAM 1963

HAYFORD 1910

HJORSEY 1955

INDIAN

IRELAND 1965

KERTAU 1948

L.C.5 ASTRO

LIBERIA 1964

LUZON

MERCHICH

MINNA

NAHRWAN

NAPARIMA, BWI

OLD EGYPTIAN

OLD HAWAIIAN

PICO DE LAS NIEVES

PROVISIONAL S-AMERICAN 1956

PROVISIONAL S-CHILEAN 1963

PUERTO RICO

QORNOQ

RT90

SANTA BRAZ

SOUTH AMERICAN 1969

SOUTHWEST BASE

TIMBALAI 1948

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-88

３

Function of USER Switch / OPTION Switch................................

USER Switch

In the initial setting, the vector length maximum ON/OFF is registered.

These funcions can be changed only by service personnel.

Functions Registerable in USER Switch:

①Vector Length Maximum: ON/OFF

ON: Vector length 60 min (max)

OFF: Vector length Time set on VECTOR TIME Menu.

②NAV/MAP INFO Menu: ON/OFF

ON: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will appear.

OFF: The NAV/MAP INFO Menu will be closed.

③Parallel Index Line Display: ON/OFF

ON: The parallel index lines set on the PI Menu will appear on the radar

display.

OFF: The displayed parallel index lines will be cleared.

OPTON Switch

①OPTON1 Switch

The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to

operate that option.

The call of a MENU is assigned at the time of factory shipments.

②OPTON2 Switch

The registered function is called. Also, if an option is connected, then this is used to

operate that option.

The call of a TEST is assigned at the time of factory shipments.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-89

３

TEST MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.MAG　CURRENT

5.PM

6.

7.

SELF CHECK

PANEL TEST

ARPATEST

ERROR LOGGING

SYSTEM INFO

OFF ON

PM

Operation of Performance monitor･････････････････････････

This function con be used only when the radar equipment is equipped with the NJU-63/64

Performance Monitor.

1 Method of Operation

In the case that the equipment is provided with radar interswitch, the interswitch

shall be set to the Master Radar mode.

1 Click TEST.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click "ON" radio button of

"5.PM".

“ON” in “5.PM” will be set and the radar will

automatically be set to RM, OFF CENTER

OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH

OFF, FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range.

The PM pattern for checking the receiving

system will appear and the [PM] indicator

bar-graph will also be in the TEST Menu to

be used for checking the transmitted power.

1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Note: All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be cancelled.

The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not be

recovered.

The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image easy to

see.

So, the test menu should be always closed after the PM has

been checked.

Procedures

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-90

３

2 Checking Transmitter System

The value of the TRANSMIT POWER indicator bar graph in the test menu indicates the

value corresponding to the transmission output power. If the indicated value becomes

extremely short against the bar length checked at the initial time, it is necessary to

request for checking of the transmitter system by a service engineer.

12 to 18NM

PM Pattern

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-91

３

Checking procedure

① Read a current value A on the bar indicator.

② Referring to the Calibration Curve I, obtain a relative attenuation d(B) for the initial bar

indicator length B that is specified in the INFORMATION LABEL.

③ Then, obtain a relative attenuation d(A) for the value A referring to the Calibration Curve I.

The value given by d(A) - d(B) represents the attenuation of the current transmission

output power compared with the value at the initial time.

④ If the attenuation value given by d(A) - d(B) is 10 dB or more (due to the life of the

magnetron), it is necessary to request for checking of the transmitter system by a service

engineer.

Figure 1

Initial bar

length

Calibration Curve I

Relative Attenuation d

Length of Bar Indicator l

Date and time o

f

initial setting

Measurement precision

Maximum range

pattern

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-92

３

(Example)

Assuming that the initial bar indication is B = 8 and the current bar indication A = 6, the relative

attenuation is d(B) = 3.5 dB, d(A) = 7 dB. Thus, d(A) - d(B) = 3.5dB.

This clearly indicates that the current transmission output power is attenuated by approximately 3.5

dB.

Example of Checking Transmitter System

Figure 2

Calibration Curve I

Relative Attenuation d

Length of Bar Indicator l

Measurement precision

Current bar indication A=6

Initial bar indication B=8

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-93

３

3 Checking Receiver System

The maximum range of the PM pattern on display indicates a deterioration of the

sensitivity of the receiver system.

Checking Procedure

⑤ Measure the PM pattern displayed on the display using the VRM of the maximum range

‘max’ from the PPI sensor.

⑥ Obtain the degree of sensitivity deterioration R (rmax) corresponding to ‘rmax’ using the

calibration curve II and indicate the degree of sensitivity deterioration of the current

receiver system.

Figure 3

Calibration curve II

Sensitivity deterioration R (rmax)

Maximum range of RM pattern (rmax)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-94

３

(Example)

Assuming that the maximum range of the initial PM pattern is rBmax = 18 NM according to the

INFORMATION LABEL, and if that of the current PM pattern is rAmax = 16 NM, the deterioration

value is ∆R (rmax) = 5dB, referring to Calibration Curve II.

This means that the receiver system has sensitivity deterioration of approximately 5dB.

Example of Checking Receiver System

Figure 4

Calibration curve II

Sensitivity deterioration value R(rmax)

PM pattern maximum range (rmax)

Initial PM

pattern

8-18NM

Current PM

pattern

16-18NM

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-95

３

SUB1 MENU

1.EBL MANEUVER

2.REACH

EBL MANEUVER

　　ON　

0

3.TURN MODE

4.TURN SET

OFF

OFF 　　ON　

*. * *

0.10-2.00nm

EXIT

0.

HEADING

T

R

*. * *

WOL

*. * *

EBL Maneuvering････････････････････････････････････････

Menu Composition

［Ⅰ］Initial Setting

1 Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU and SUB1 MENU .

The EBL MANEUBER Menu will appear.

2 Click the numeric section of REACH.

REACH will be selected.

The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

3 Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.

4 Press END .

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-96

３

5 Click TURN MODE.

TURN MODE will be selected.

Select any turn mode.

RADIUS: Constant turn diameter (NM)

RATE: Constant turn speed (deg/min)

6 Click the numeric setting section of TURN SET .

TURN SET will be selected.

The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

7 Set the numeric value in the dialogue box.

8 Press END .

Note: If the initial setting is not correct, the maneuver curve will be

affected.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-97

３

［Ⅱ］Creating Maneuver Curve

1 Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU and SUB1 MENU .

The EBL MANEUBER Menu will appear.

2 Click "ON" radio button of EBL MANEUVER.

“ON” in “1.EBL MANEUBER” will be set and a supplemental line, a maneuver

curve and WOL will appear on the radar display.

3 Set the starting point of the supplemental line using the

trackball and click to fix it.

The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting

point of the supplemental line. If the WOL is behind own ship's position, the line

color of the WOL sill change.

4 Set the bearing of the supplemental line using the [EBL]

control.

The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will

finally move. The position of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of

the supplemental line. If WOL is behind own ship's position, the line color of the

WOL will change.

5 Select by left-clicking the trackball.

The setting will be established. However, if the WOL is behind own ship's

position, the entry of Click will be rejected and the setting will not be

established.

Note: If the [EBL] is pressed during the EBL MANEUVER operation,

the Menu will be closed and the maneuver curve creating

operation will be stopped.

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-98

３

1 Click "OFF" radio button of EBL MNEUVER.

“OFF”in “1.EBL MANEUVER”will be set and the EBL MANEUVER function will

set to OFF.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

WOL：Steering point

REACH：Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn

R：Turning radius

Procedures

Exit

Maneuver Curve

Scheduled Route

Supplemental Line

Own Ship's Position

REACH

HL

WOL

R

O

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

3-99

３

SECTION 4

MEASUREMENT OF RANGE

AND BEARING

Measurement by Trackball ................................... 4-1

Measurement by Range Rings............................. 4-2

Measurement by EBLs and VRMs ....................... 4-2

Measurement between Two Optional Points ...... 4-4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4-1

４

Measurement by Trackball･･･････････････････････････

1. Check the target echoes on the radar display.

2. Move the cross cursor mark to a target by the trackball.

The [CURSOR] on the radar display indicates the bearing and range of the

target.

The range is a distance from own ship’s position.

TRUE 45.0° True bearing of the cursor relative to own ship

5.0nm Range between the cursor anda own ship

REL 45.0° Relative bearing of the cursor relative to own ship

CURSOR（）

Cursor

5.0NM

Target

Own Ship

180

90

270

0

45°

Fig. 4.1

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4-2

４

Measurement by Range Rings･････････････････････････････

1.

1 SP

6-+

NUPRM

TRANSMIT

X-BAND

Press

The Range Rings will appear on the radar display.

The range between the target and own ships can be determined by visually

measuring the target’s position that lies between two range rings.

(The range ring interval is fixed and indicates at the upper left of the radar

display.)

Measurement by EBLs and VRMs･･････････････････････････

1. Press to select EBL1 display and operation.

The “EBL1” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and

the EBL1 will appear as a broken-line on the PPI display.

2. Turn the [EBL] control to put EBL1 on a target.

The bearing of the EBL1 will appear at the lower right of the radar display.

The EBL1 bearing represents the target’s bearing.

3. Press to select VRM1 display and operation.

The “VRM1” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected

and the VRM1 will appear as a broken-line circle on the PPI display.

4. Move the broken-line VRM1 to the target by using the

trackball.

The range of the VRM1 from own ship will appear at the lower right of the radar

display. The range of VRM1 signifies a distance between the target and own

ship.

Refer to Fig. 4.2 in the next page.

In this figure, the range and bearing are;

Range: 5.0 nm

Bearing: 45.0°

Procedures

EBL1

VRM1

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4-3

４

180

90

270

0

45°

5.0NM

Target

Own Ship

VRM1

EBL1

VRM1

EBL2

VRM2

45.0°

5.0nm

nm

EBL1

VRM1

EBL Control

Fig. 4.2

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4-4

４

Measurement between Two Optional Points･････････････････

1. Press to select EBL2 display and operation.

The “EBL2” indication at the lower right of the radar display will be selected and

the EBL2 will appear as a dotted-line on the PPI display.

2. Left-click the C switch at the lower right of the EBL2.

3. Using the trackball, move the starting point of EBL2 to one

(A) of the two points.

(See Fig. 4.3.)

4. Turn the [EBL] control to move EBL2 to the other point (B).

(See Fig. 4.3.)

5. Press to select VRM2 display and operation.

(● VRM marker) will appear on a dotted-line of the EBL2.

6. Using the trackball, move the VRM2 marker on a dotted-line of

EBL2 to the point B.

The VRM2 marker ● moves away from the center of the display by turning the

trackball clockwise, and closer to the center.

The bearing and range between the two points will appear in the “VRM2” and

“EBL2” area on the lower right of the radar display.

Procedures

EBL2

VRM2

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4-5

４

180

90

270

0

VRM1

EBL1

EBL2

VRM2

340.0°

nm

3.0nm

90.0°

VRM2

VRM2 Marker

EBL2

90DEG

Starting Point of EBL2

Cape

A

B

3NM

Own Ship

EBL1

340

EBL2

VRM2

EBL Control

Fig. 4.3

It is also possible to use EBL1 instead of EBL2 in measuring the bearing and

range between two optional points. In the procedures above, change EBL2

into EBL1 and VRM2 into VRM1, and left-click C of the EBL2 in step 2.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4-6

４

SECTION 5

OPERATION OF ARPA

Using ARPA ...........................................................................5-1

5.1 INITIAL SETTING .........................................................5-2

Setting Collision Decision Criteria: SAFE LIMIT...............5-2

Automatic Setting Mode (System Start) ..............................5-4

Setting Range Scale: RANGE SCALE.............................5-4

Setting Own Ship’s Speed...................................................5-5

5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING...........................................5-7

Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] ...............................5-7

Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ........................5-7

5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY.............................................5-8

5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION ...............................................5-9

Automatic Acquisition [AUTO].............................................5-9

Manual Acquisition [MANUAL].......................................... 5-11

Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1、GZ2]

[ACQ MANUAL] ................................................................5-12

5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY.................................................5-13

Display of Vectors .............................................................5-13

Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN] ...........................5-16

5.6 DATA DISPLAY ...........................................................5-18

Types of Data Display .......................................................5-18

Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA].................5-19

Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA].........5-19

5.7 ALARM DISPLAY .......................................................5-20

Dangerous Target Alarm: CPA/TCPA .............................5-20

Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE]..................................5-21

Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET] ..................................5-22

System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)] ............................5-23

Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO] ............................................5-23

5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING..............................................5-24

Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ......................5-24

Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode ................5-25

Using the TRIAL Function.................................................5-26

5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS ..........................5-27

Deleting Targets ................................................................5-27

5.10 ARPA SETTING........................................................5-29

Simulation .........................................................................5-30

Gate Size ..........................................................................5-32

Test Video .........................................................................5-34

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-1

５

T

here are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and tracking

f

unctions of ARPA:

[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic

tracking

DepENTing on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between

adjacent targets during automatic tracking usually ranges somewhere

between 0.03 and 0.05 nm. If multiple targets approach each other,

resolution will become about 0.03 nm and this may cause the system to

regard them as one target and thus to swap between them or lose one o

r

more of them. Such swapping or loss of targets may also occur if the

target image is affected by rain or snow clutter, sea clutter or if the target

moves close to land.

[II] Intensity of echoes and the tracking function

The intensity of echoes and the tracking function are correlated, and thus

the target will be lost if no echoes are detected for six consecutive scans.

Therefore, if there is a lost target, radar gain must be increased to improve

target detection. If, however, radar gain is increased too much, sea clutte

r

or other noise may be mistakenly detected and tracked as a target, and a

false alarm may result. In such cases, do not apply strong impact to the

touch panel, trackball or gain, because doing so may cause a malfunction.

[III] Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking

To execute accurate tracking, it is necessary to accurately adjust the

[GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] controls of the radar so that the target to be

acquired and tracked is clearly displayed. Inappropriate settings for these

controls will reduce the reliability and accuracy of automatic tracking.

Using ARPA

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-2

５

 Set the optimum values of collision decision conditions, depENTing on the vessel

type, water area, weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the relations

between those conditions and alarms, refer to section 5.7 “ALARM DISPLAY.”)

5.1 INITIAL SETTING

The initial settings for using the ARPA functions are described in this section.

Setting Collision Decision Criteria: SAFE LIMIT･････････････

See sections 3.4 “Basic Operations” and 4 “Measurement of Range and Bearing” for descriptions of

operation.

Before starting, check the collision decision criteria settings.

1 Press MENU or OPTION2 key on the

screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU , then ARPA/AIS.

The ARPA Menu will appear.

3 Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of

Approach).

(1) Left-click the“CPA LIMIT”edit box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be

opened.

(2) Set the number by pressing the“+”or“−”keys in dialogue box.

(3) Press ENT to set up the value entry.

The input number will be fixed.

Attention

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

1.CPA LIMIT

2.TCPA LIMIT

０．

EXIT

0.0-9.9nm

ARPA/AIS

1.5

3.CPA RING

TRIAL

4.

5.GATE

2.HIGH

OFF

ON

1-99min

10

AIS SETTING

6.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-3

５

4 Display the CPA LIMIT ring.

(1) Click the "ON" of "3.CPA RING".

“ON”in“3.CPA RING”will be set

and“CPA RING”will appear on the

radar display.

(2) Should the CPA ring not appear, click

the "OFF" of "3.CPA RING".

"OFF" in "3.CPA RING" will be set.

Attention: The CPA RING is not appear in the TRUE Vector mode.

5 Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)

(1) Click the numeric section of "2.TCPA

LIMIT".

The numeric input dialogue box will be

opened.

(2) Set the number by pressing

the“+”or“−”keys in the dialogue box.

(3) Press ENT to set up the value entry.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Attention: The set values of CPA LIMIT/TCPA

LIMIT will appear on the radar display.

Exit

SUB1 MENU

1.CPA LIMIT

2.TCPA LIMIT

０．

EXIT

0.0-9.9nm

ARPA/AIS

1.5

3.CPA RING

TRIAL

4.

5.GATE

2.HIGH

OFF

ON

1-99min

10

AIS SETTING

6.

SUB1 MENU

2.TCPA LIMIT

０．

EXIT

0.0-9.9nm

ARPA/AIS

1.5

3.CPA RING

TRIAL

4.

5.GATE

2.HIGH

OFF

ON

1-99min

10

AIS SETTING

6.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-4

５

Automatic Setting Mode (System Start)･････････････････････

See sections 3.4 “Basic Operations” and 4 “Measurement of Range and Bearing” for descriptions

of operation.

Fig. 5-1 Mode Setting at System Start

Mode Initial setting Refer to Section

DISPLAY MODE RM (relative motion) 3.4

ACQUIRE AUTO OFF 5.3

TRIAL OFF 5.7

GUARD ZONE OFF 3.4, 5.6

Setting Range Scale: (RANGE SCALE)･･････････････････････

The ARPA functions can operate on all range scales. Usually, set the range between 1.5 to 24 NM

depENTing on the area of operation.

Attention: The ARPA acquisition range is 0.1 to 32 NM.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-5

５

Setting Own Ship’s Speed･････････････････････････････････

[Ⅰ] When the LOG is not in operation (Manual Setting)

If the LOG is not in operation, set the estimated ship’s speed manually.

1 Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on

the screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 .

The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

3 Left-click the “2.SELECT SPEED” edit

box.

The “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box will be

selected.

4 Click MANUAL .

1.MNUAL will be set.

5 Click SET MANUAL SPEED .

“3.SET MANUAL SPEED”will be set.

The numeric input dialogue box will be

opened.

6 Set the number by pressing the “+” or

“−” keys in the dialogue box.

7 Press ENT to set up the value entry.

Own ship's speed will be set.

Procedures

SUB1 MENU

SETTING1

2.SELECT SPEED

SET MANUAL SPEED

SELECT NAV

SET/DRIFT

TIME/DAY

SETTING2

EXIT

2.HIGH

1. MANUAL

2. 1AXIS

3. 2AXIS W

4. 2AXIS G

5. GPS

1.SET GYRO

0.0-359.9°

7.PRF

8.RANGE SELECT

3.

4.

5.

6.

96nm

120nm

9.

0.

0.0

SUB1 MENU

SETTING1

SET MANUAL SPEED

SELECT NAV

SET/DRIFT

TIME/DAY

SETTING2

EXIT

2.HIGH

1.SET GYRO

0.0-359.9°

7.PRF

8.RANGE SELECT

3.

4.

5.

6.

96nm

120nm

9.

0.

0.0

2.SELECT SPEED

2. 1AXIS

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-6

５

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

[Ⅱ] When the LOG is operating

When the system is set to the LOG mode, the speed signal will be entered automatically and the ship’s

speed will appear on the radar display.

The speed devices which are displayed on the screen are as follows:

LOG...............1-axis log

2AXW ............2-axis log Speed against water

2AXG.............2-axis log Speed against ground

GPS...............Speed from GPS

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-7

５

5.2 DISPLAY MODE SETTING

Setting Motion Display Mode [TM/RM]･･････････････････････

Press RM(R) / TM button on the upper left of the screen, then select the true motion (TM) display

mode or the relative motion (RM) display mode.

In the initial state, the mode is set to RM.

Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 “Select True/Relative Motion

Display Mode.”

Setting Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]･･･････････････････

Set the bearing display mode by pressing N UP/H UP/C UP on the upper left of the screen.

Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

For further details on the TM/RM modes, refer to section 3.4 “Select True/Relative Motion

Display Mode.”

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-8

５

5.3 TARGET ID No. DISPLAY

The target ID number is a number displayed next to the symbol when a target ship is acquired.

This number is allocated to target ships from 1 to 50 in the order that they are acquired. This number

is used to identify each target ship until the target ship is lot or released.

Attention: Whether the Target ID No. display is turned ON or OFF can be checked only

with a target acquired. For a description of acquisition, refer to 5.4 “Target

Acquisition.”

Depress to turn Target ID No. Display ON or OFF.

With this display ON, the target ID NO. is displayed next to the capture symbol.

With this display OFF, all the target ID Nos. are non-displayed.

However, the numbers remain displayed for captured targets of which numeric data

display is specified.

Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

For a description on how to specify the numeric data display, refer to 5.6 “Data Display.”

TGT

DATA

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-9

５

 It is important to adjust the controls [SEA] and [GAIN] properly in the automatic

target acquisition mode to minimize the effect of sea clutter.

 If untracked targets enter the guard zone when the maximum number of targets

(50 targets) is already being tracked, targets with lower levels of danger will be

cancelled and replaced.

5.4 TARGET ACQUISITION

Target acquisition can be performed in two modes, AUTO and MANUAL, and both

modes can be used at the same time.

Automatic Acquisition [AUTO]･････････････････････････････

1 Click GZ1 or GZ2 on the screen.

Automatic target acquisition will start. The target acquired will be marked with

“▽” and its target ID No., which will move with the target. Its vector will appear

within one minute.

Attention: When the Target ID No. display is set to OFF, any acquired target ship will not

be given a target ID No.

Attention

Procedures

0°

45°-45°

3NM

0.5NM

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-10

５

In the ACQ AUTO mode, the targets within a guard zone will be acquired

automatically. The guard zone can be set arbitrarily. If a guard zone is not set,

a guard zone of 3 NM and ±45 degrees in the direction of the own ship will be set.

(Guard Zone 1: Heading direction, Guard Zone 2: Sternward direction)

For the setting method, refer to section 3.4 “Set Guard Zones.”

Guard zone 1 will come on when GZ1 is clicked. When GZ1 is pressed again,

automatic tracking will turn off and the guard zone will be erased from the radar

screen, but other ships that were being tracked shall continue to be tracked.

Target that has entered the guard zone.

The guard zone intruder symbol is displayed.

Target that has continued to intrude in the guard

zone for one minute.

The guard zone intruded symbol, acquired symbol

and vector are displayed.

Target that has moved outside the guard zone.

The capture symbol and vector are displayed.

The guard zone intruder symbol is cleared.

Guard Zone

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-11

５

 If the maximum number of targets (50) is already acquired, then new targets

cannot be acquired. To do so, cancel any current targets that are not required.

Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]･････････････････････････

1 Press .

2 Move the cross cursor on to the target to be acquired, then

press the left trackball button .

The acquired target will be marked with “ ” and it’s target ID No. Its vector will

appear within one minute.

Attention: When the Target ID No. display is set to OFF, any captured target ship will not

be given a target ID No.

Number of Targets and Acquisition Area

To use the manual acquisition mode only without the automatic mode on concurrently,

press [ACQ AUTO] to turn Automatic Acquisition OFF.

Attention

Procedures

Target to be acquired

HL

ACQ

MANUAL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-12

５

Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [GZ1、GZ2]

[ACQ MANUAL]･･･････････････････････････････････････････

Method of Operation

Execute manual target acquisition in the automatic acquisition mode, that is, in the state in

which the Automatic Acquisition mode [GZ1, GZ2] is ON.

Use of Combined Auto/Manual Mode

When both automatic and manual acquisition modes are used concurrently, important

targets should be acquired manually, and the rest should be acquired automatically. If

new targets enter the zone and they exceed the maximum number of targets that can be

acquired, manual targets will continue to be displayed until they leave the guard zone, but

automatically acquired targets will be cancelled according to their degree of importance.

Manually acquired target.

The initial acquisition symbol is displayed.

Target that has intruded into the zone for one minute.

The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-13

５

 When a targeting or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired,

the vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has

passed after such a course change or target acquisition.

Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an erro

r

depENTing upon the tracking conditions.

5.5 ARPA DATA DISPLAY

(Refer to the Display Example on page 2-1.)

Display of Vectors･････････････････････････････････････････

A vector representing a target’s predicted position can be presented in the TRUE vector or RELATIVE

vector mode. In each mode, a vector length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 60

minutes.

[I] Vector Mode Selection

True Vector Mode

In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of the

target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.

In this mode, the own ship’s vector is displayed as shown below.

In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily

monitored. However, no CPA RING can be displayed in this mode.

Own ship’s vector

True vector

The relative vector is not displayed.

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-14

５

Relative Vector Mode

In order to display the relative vector of a target, press the T/R VECT switch to select

the Relative Vector mode.

The relative vector does not represent the true motion of a target, but its relative relation

with the own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed at the own ship

(passing through the CPA LIMIT ring) is a dangerous target.

In the Relative Vector mode, the CPA LIMIT of targets can be seen at a glance

.

Therefore, the TRUE/REL modes can be used in the following way: The TRUE vector can

be used to know the true aspect of a target, and the REL vector can be used to know the

closest point of approach (CPA) of a target.

Relative vector

The true vector is not displayed.

CPA RING

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-15

５

ARPA STAB GND

VECTOR

LIMIT

min

6

min

10

nm

1.5

PAST POSN

GUARD ZONE

1 min

21

T

[II] Vector Length: VECTOR TIME

The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can be

changed from 1 to 60 minutes.

The figure below illustrates a vector length of a target of six minutes. The tip of the vector

represents the target’s expected position in six minutes.

Setting Vector Time

In order to display the relative vector, press the [TRUE/REL] key to select it.

1 Click the numeric section

of

“VECTOR”.

The numeric input dialogue box is

opened.

2 When changing vector constants, left-click the numbers 0 to 9

or the “+” or “−” keys to change the vectors.

3 Click ENT .

The number input will be applied as the vector time.

Current position

Future predicted position

(Six minutes later in this example)

Procedures

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-16

５

Display of Past Positions [PAST POSN]･････････････････････

Press the [PAST POSN] switch to display the past position of targets.

A maximum of six past positions for each target can appear. Every time the [PAST POSN]

switch is pressed, the time interval is changed between 0.5, 1, 2 and 4 minutes. When the

interval is 4 and the switch is pressed again, the past positions on display will be turned

OFF.

The interval is displayed under PAST POSN in the

ARPA information screen. When OFF is

displayed, the past position display is turned off.

The trail mode is interlocked with the vector mode

to allow the past positions of a target to appear in

the True or Relative Vector mode. In the Relative

Vector mode, the target’s relative past positions

are displayed. In the True Vector mode, the

target’s true past positions are displayed after

calculating them from its relative bearing and

range, and the course and speed of the own ship.

Fig. 5-2 shows an example of a screENTisplay,

and Table 5-1 shows the meanings of the symbols on the radar screen.

Trackball

(Cursor)

Lost target

Untracked target

NAV line

Past Positions

(Straight course)

Safe target

(Changed course)

Dangerous target

Target intruding into the guard zone

Guard zone

Past positions

HL

Fig. 5.2 Example of Display (In North Up and True Vector Mode)

In addition to the marks and symbols shown above, fixed/variable range markers, electronic

bearing lines and other symbols are shown in an actual image.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-17

５

Table 5.1 Definitions of Symbols

Vector/Symbol

Definition Remarks

Tracked target

Dangerous target

(CPA/TCPA)

Alarm characters (CPA/TCPA) appear and

an alarm sounds. The vector and symbol

blink.

Initial acquisition

mark

Displayed after a target is acquired and until

its vector is displayed.

Target with its data

indicated

WhENTesignating a target’s data indication

with the trackball, the target’s symbol is

changed into □ and the target’s ID is

indicated. However, in case of a lost target

or a dangerous target, its corresponding

symbol is displayed instead of □.

Lost target

(This symbol appears

when a target cannot

be tracked for any

reason.)

Alarm characters (LOST) appear and an

alarm sounds. No vector is displayed, but

the symbol blinks.

Target that has entered

the guard zone

Alarm characters (GZ) appear and an alarm

sounds.

The symbol blinks.

Trackball cross cursor

This cursor is used to select a target when

acquiring manually, canceling targets and

for setting numerical data.

Post positions of

targets

The symbols and vectors are only displayed

when [PAST POSN] is ON.

The position interval can be set to 0.5, 1, 2 or

4 minutes.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-18

５

 When a target or the own ship changes course or when a target is acquired, the

vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has

passed after such a course change or target acquisition.

Even if three minutes or more have passed, the vector may include an erro

r

depENTing upon the tracking conditions.

5.6 DATA DISPLAY

Types of Data Display･･････････････････････････････････････

Target Data

Target identification (ID) ID number of the target

True bearing: T BRG 0.1 degree units

Range: RNG 0.01 NM units

True course: T CSE 0.1 degree units

True speed: T SPD 0.1 knot units

Closest point of approach (CPA) 0.1 NM units

Time to CPA (TCPA) 0.1 minute units

Bow crossing range (BCR) 0.1 NM units

Bow crossing time (BCT) 0.1 minute units

Targets that have their numeric data displayed are indicated with the symbol “

□” to

distinguish them from other targets.

Note━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

If a target’s data is displayed, but without the symbol “□”, such a target exists

outside the currently shown radar display.

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-19

５

Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]･･･････････････

1 Press .

TGT DATA will appear in the CURSOR ( ) at the upper right of the radar

screen.

2 Move the cross cursor to a target (being tracked) to indicate its

data using the trackball. Next, press the left trackball button

to select it. (Up to two targets can be selected.)

The data of the designated target will be displayed, and the symbol will change to

“□”. The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and

its vector disappears, or until another target is designated.

If a target with the “ ” symbol is designated, only its true bearing (BRG) and

range (RNG) will appear until its vector appears.

Cancellation of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]･･･････････

1 Press .

TGT DATA will appear in the CURSOR ( )at the upper right of the radar

screen.

2 Move the cross cursor to a target (being target) to indicate its

data using the trackball. Next, press the right trackball button

to select it.

The data of the designated target will be deleted, and the symbol will, change to

acquisition mark.

Procedures

TGT

DATA

TGT

DATA

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-20

５

If either the CPA LIMIT or TCPA LIMIT is set to zero, then the

dangerous target alarm will not operate.

Since these alarms may include some errors depENTing on the

target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should

make the final decision for ship operations such as collision

avoidance.

CAUTION

5.7 ALARM DISPLAY

The ARPA system provides the following alarms:

Dangerous target alarm: CPA/TCPA

Guard zone intrusion alarm: GZ

Lost target alarm: LOST

System function alarm: ARPA (DATA)

Gyro set alarm: SET GYRO

Dangerous Target Alarm: (CPA/TCPA)･･･････････････････････

In the ARPA system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked targets and

dangerous targets. The degree of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a

glance, so that an officer can easily decide to which target he should pay attention.

The types of targets and alarms are shown below.

Dangerous Target Alarm

Status

Symbol on

CRT

Alarm

characters

Alarm sound Conditions

Tracking

target

○ (OFF) (OFF)

• CPA>CPA LIMIT

• 0>TCPA

• TCPA>TCPA LIMIT

Dangerous

target

△

CPA/

TCPA

Beeping

(pee-poh)

Acknowledgeable

• CPA≤

CPA LIMIT

0≤

TCPA≤TCPA LIMIT

CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT: The setting values

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-21

５

In setting a guard zone, it is necessary to adjust radar tuning,

gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression

to ensure that target echoes are displayed in the optimum

conditions. The guard zone alarm is not generated for the

targets that are not detected by radar.

CAUTION

Guard Zone Alarm [GUARD ZONE]･･････････････････････････

The guard zone function is used to set a zone at an arbitrary range and to sound an alarm if

a target intrudes into this zone.

Refer to section 3.4 “Set Guard Zones” on how to set guard zones.

Guard Zone Alarm

Status

Symbol on

CRT

Alarm

characters

Alarm sound Conditions

Target

entering the

guard zone ▽ GZ

Beeping (pipipi)

Acknowledgeable

An alarm sound is

generated when a target

enters the 0.5 NM range

between the outer and inner

rings.

Guard zone

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-22

５

 If the radar tuning, gain, sea clutter suppression and rain/snow clutter suppression

are not appropriate, the lost target alarm may be generated frequently, so that

adjustments should be made carefully.

Lost Target Alarm [LOST TARGET]･･････････････････････････

When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, the LOST target

alarm will be generated. The typical causes for this alarm are shown below, but they are

not limited to these:

• The target echo is very weak;

• The target has entered the shadow of land or a large ship and its echo is not being

received;

• The target echo is hidden by sea clutter.

Lost Target Alarm

Status

Symbol on

CRT

Alarm

characters

Alarm sound Conditions

Lost target LOST Beep sound (pee)

Acknowledgeable

The alarm will sound once

when a lost target symbol is

displayed.

Lost target

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-23

５

System Function Alarm [ARPA (DATA)]･･････････････････････

When an abnormal state of an input signal or a problem in the processing circuitry occurs, a

character string or alarm is generated. When an alarm occurs for any ARPA function,

ARPA (DATA) will appear in the WARNING display area, but no indication is made in the

ARPA information display. The cause of the alarm may be an operational error in ARPA,

so please contact the service depot or manufacturer.

Gyro Set Alarm [SET GYRO]････････････････････････････････

The North Stabilizing Kit (NSK) in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the

power is turned off, the system will track gyro motions. However, the system stops

tracking the gyro if the power of the master gyro is turned off or if there are any problems

with the line. When the power of the master gyro is turned back on, the SET GYRO alarm

will be generated.

If this alarm is sounded, set the gyro.

Gyro Set Alarm

Alarm

characters

Alarm sound Conditions

SET GYRO Beep sound (pipi)

The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the gyro is

recovered.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-24

５

 In trial maneuvering, a simulation is executed with the current course and speed

of the target ship. Since the situation is different from actual ship maneuvers, the

CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT should be set with ample leeway.

5.8 TRIAL MANEUVERING

Trial maneuvering is used to simulate the course and speed necessary to avoid a collision

when a dangerous target appears. When the ship’s course and speed are manually

entered against the data of the acquired target, a check is made to determine whether there

is any danger.

The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually are as follows:

Course: 360 degrees (0.1 degree intervals) ..................[EBL] control

Speed: 0 to 100 knots (0.1 knot steps)......................... [VRM] control

Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode･･････････････････

In the True Vector mode, calculations are made according to the values set by TRIAL

SPEED and TRIAL COURSE, and the result is displayed as a bold-line that represents the

change of the own ship’s vector as shown in the figure below (an example of the course

changed to starboard).

In this figure, the dangerous target that is ahead to the port side becomes safe as a result of

the simulation.

The target data display field indicates the current CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT values

regardless of the result of the simulation.

Attention

TRIAL

NORMAL

Dangerous target

Own ship

T

Change in course

Trial speed (vector time)

Change of symbol as a

result of trial maneuver

HL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-25

５

Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode･･･････････････

The result of trial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a change in target

vector. In the figure below (with the same conditions as in the True Vector mode on the

previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a dangerous one because its vector is

crossing the CPA RING.

The above figure shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as shown in the

figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the target’s symbol is changed to

“○”; i.e., a safe target. As was the case in the True Vector mode, the data display field

indicates the current values of CPA LIMIT and TCPA LIMIT, not those as the result of the

simulation.

The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted line.

Own ship

T

Dangerous target

HL

CPA RING

Own ship

NORMAL

Change of symbol as a

result of trial maneuver

CPA RING

Change in course

TRIAL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-26

５

Using the TRIAL Function･･････････････････････････････････

1 Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on the screen.

The ARPA menu will be opened.

2 Click SUB1 MENU , then ARPA/AIS and TRIAL .

The ARPA TRIAL menu will be opened.

3 Left-click “ON” under “1.TRIAL”.

“1.TRIAL” will be turned “ON” and the character “T” will blink below the own ship

display in the radar screen, indicating that the system is conducting a trial.

4 Make the settings with the course [EBL] control and speed

[VRM] control.

5 The plot data symbols are “△” for dangerous targets and “○”

for safe targets.

1 Select OFF under TRIAL in the ARPA TRIAL menu.

“OFF” will be set for “TRIAL” and the system will return to the normal display.

1 Click EXIT .

The ARPA TRIAL menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The ARPA menu will be closed.

Procedures

Cancellation

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-27

５

5.9 DELETING UNWANTED TARGETS

When it is no longer necessary to continue tracking acquired and tracked targets with their

symbols and vectors displayed, or when it necessary to reduce the number of vectors to

make the screen easier to observe, unnecessary targets can be cancelled one by one.

When all targets are reacquired from the beginning, all the targets on display can be

cancelled at once.

Deleting Targets･･････････････････････････････････････････

Deleting one target

1 Press .

The ARPA menu is opened.

2 Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.

3 Press the left trackball button.

The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will

remain.

Or,

1 Press .

The ARPA menu is opened.

2 Place the cross cursor over the target to be deleted.

Procedures

ACQ

CANCEL

ACQ

MANUAL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-28

５

 When all targets are deleted, the system stops tracking all the targets and the

y

must be acquired again, either automatically or manually. Therefore, do not use

this method except when it is necessary to delete all targets.

3 Press the left trackball button.

The symbol and vector of the target will be deleted, and only the target echo will

remain.

Deleting all targets

1 Press continuously for 2 seconds or more.

All the symbols and vectors of all targets will be deleted.

Target to be deleted.

Procedures

Attention

ACQ

CANCEL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-29

５

This simulation is a function to check whether the ARPA system is

operating normally. Do not use this function except to check

ARPA operation.

Especially, avoid using this mode during actual navigation

because it will display pseudo targets on the radar screen which

may be confused with actual targets. Using this function during

actual navigation can lead to accidents.

CAUTION

5.10 ARPA SETTING

The following constants used for ARPA can be referred to and modified:

[I] SIMULATOR: Pseudo targets are generated on the radar display to check

whether the ARPA functions are operating normally.

[II] VD LEVEL: Quantizing level for the video to be input to the target

detection circuit.

[III] VECTOR CONSTANT: Constant to calculate the ARPA vectors.

[IV] GATE: Gate size to acquire and track targets.

[V] TEST VIDEO: Test video for use in checking the operation of the target

detection circuit.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-30

５

Do not change the VD LEVEL and VECTOR CONSTANT,

because they are already set to the optimum values. Making

any changes to these may cause deterioration in the ARPA

performance.

CAUTION

Simulation･･････････････････････････････････････････

Pseudo targets are generated in certain known positions to check whether the ARPA

processing circuits are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move according to

known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be compared with the known

values by acquiring, tracking and displaying them, and thereby checking whether the ARPA

system is operating normally.

This function should be used only in the standby

mode.

1 Press to set

the standby mode.

2 Click TEST on the screen.

Or press OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

3 Click ARPA TEST .

The ARPA TEST menu will appear.

4 Click the “1.SIMULATOR” edit

box.

SIMULATOR is selected, and the pull down

menu is displayed.

Procedures

TX

STBY

TEST MENU

ARPA TEST

1.SIMULATOR

1.OFF

3.SCENARIO2

2.TEST VIDEO

1.OFF

2.SCENARIO1

STAUS

3.

EXIT

0.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-31

５

5 When moving the pseudo target:

[Ⅰ] SCENARIO1

Click SCENARIO1 , then to set the transmission mode.

2.SCENARIO1 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing

of 18°and the relative range of 3.2NM. The target will then approach true

bearing of 90°and the relative range of 1NM at a relative speed of

20kts .Characters“XX”appear blinking at the lower of the radar display,

showing that the system is executing the simulation mode.

[Ⅱ] SCENARIO2

Click SCENARIO2 , then to set the transmission mode.

3.SCENARIO2 will be set to generate a pseudo target at the true bearing of

0°and the relative range of 6NM. The target will then approach own ship at

a relative speed of 10 kts in a relative course of 180°.

Characters“XX”appear blinking at the lower of the radar display, showing

that the system is executing the simulation mode.

Note: When the range between own ship and the pseudo target is 0,

the target will disappear.

6 When finishing the simulation, press to set the standby

mode, then click OFF .

1.OFF will be set.

1 Click EXIT or TEST .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Pseudo Target Parameters

Start point End point SCENARIO

NUMBER

Distance Direction Distance Direction

Target

speed

1 3.2NM

18°

1NM

90°

20kts

2 6NM

0°

0NM

0°

10kts

3 6NM

18°

1NM

18°

10kts

4 6NM

45°

1NM

45°

105kts

5 6NM

45°

6NM

150°

20kts

6 6NM

45°

6NM

150°

20kts

Exit

TX

STBY

TX

STBY

TX

STBY

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-32

５

Do not change the preset gate size carelessly. If the gate value is

improper, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions may

deteriorate.

Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.

CAUTION

Gate Size･････････････････････････････････････････････････

The Gate Size is defined as an“Area Within which targets are watched by the ARPA”processing

circuit.

If the gate size is too large, targets are not lost but may be swapped with other close targets.

If the gate size is too small, targets are not easily swapped, but may be lost.

The ARPA processing circuit is designed to detect target sizes and set an accurate gate size

depENTing on the ranges and sizes of those targets (NARROW is the standard size). However,

change the setting parameters to select the best size in the following conditions:

Set 2.NARROW in normal operation.

・When acquiring and tracking targets that spread widely in the angular direction

(The angular direction of the gate aperture is important)･･････････････････････1.WIDE

・When many targets are densely congested and swapped within 3NM in a port

(The gate size should be reduced)･･････････････････････････････････････････3.SMALL

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-33

５

1 Press the MENU or OPTION2 key on the screen.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU , then

ARPA/AIS.

The ARPA Menu will appear.

3 Click the “5.GATE” edit box.

The “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box

will be selected.

4 Press any of 1 to 3.

Enter the number of gate type to

change.

1 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

SUB1 MENU

ARPA

1.5

10

ON

OFF

1.CPA LIMIT

2.TCPA LIMIT

3.CPA RING

0.1-9.9nm

1-99min

TRIAL

4.

5.GATE

2.NARROW

1. W IND

3. SMALL

EXIT

0.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-34

５

 TEST VIDEO may not appear for targets that are not acquired or tracked, or if the

controls [GAIN] and [SEA] are not adjusted appropriately.

Test Video････････････････････････････････････････････････

Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking

are inputted to and processed in the target processing circuit normally.

However, it is sufficient to check that 3.VDH in TEST VIDEO is displayed.

The start of the Test video mode is available only in the Standby mode.

1 Press to set

the standby mode.

2 Click TEST on the screen.

Or press OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

3 Click ARPA TEST .

The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

4 Click the “2.TEST VIDEO” edit box.

“2.TEST VIDEO” is selected and the pull down

menu is displayed.

5 Click “3.VDH” to select it.

3.VDH will be set.

Test video for 3.VDH (video input in quantizing HIGH level) will appear on the

radar display.

6 Press to set

the transmission state.

7 In order to change the test video type, press to enter

the standby mode, then select the test video type from the pull

down menu.

Attention: If OFF is set, test video will not be displayed.

Procedures

Attention

TX

STBY

TX

STBY

TX

STBY

TEST MENU

ARPA TEST

1.SIMULATOR

1.OFF

2.TEST VIDEO

3.VDIN

3.VDH

4.VDL

5.VDIN

2.VDG

1.OFF

3.

EXIT

0.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

5-35

５

1 Click EXIT or TEST.

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Execute TEST VIDEO in 3.VDH normally.

Attention: If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not displayed in the

Test Video mode, the target detection circuit og te ARPA system may

have a trouble.

Exit

SECTION 6

TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES

ON DISPLAY

Radar Wave with the Horizon .......................................... 6-1

Strength of Reflection from the Targets ......................... 6-3

Sea Clutters.......................................................................6-3

False Echoes.....................................................................6-3

Display of Radar Transponder (SART) ........................... 6-6

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

6-1

６

The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in

maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully

understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the radar has. For better interpretation of

radar displays, it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair

weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the

radar display.

The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas, to

check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to measure own ship’s position in the

coastal waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to

monitor the position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.

Various types of radar display will be explained below.

Radar Wave with the Horizon･･････････････････････････････

Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth.

The propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam

propagates.

In the normal propagation, the distance (D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10%

longer than the distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following

formula:

)nm)(2h1h(23.2D +=

h1: Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level

h2: Height (m) of a target above sea level

Fig. 6.1 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that is limited by the

curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.

Earth

Targets

Radar

h1

h2

D

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

6-2

６

Fig. 6.1

When the height of own ship’s scanner is 10 m for instance,

(a) A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display is required to

have a height of 660 m or more.

(b) If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm. However, the

maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display depends upon

the size of the target and the weather conditions, that is, the radar range may increase or

decrease depending upon those conditions.

D (nm)

Height of Scanner

Detective Range

Height of Target

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

6-3

６

Strength of Reflection from the Targets･････････････････････

The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target

but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher and larger target is not

always higher in general.

In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of the coast.

If the coast has a very gentle slope, the echo from a mountain on the inland appears on the radar

display.

Therefore, the distance to the coast line should be measured carefully.

Mountain displayed on the radar display

Sea shore line not displayed on the radar display

HL

Fig. 6.2

Sea Clutters･･････････････････････････････････････････････

When the sea surface ruffles, bright echo returns spread around the center of the radar display.

The higher the waves are, the echo returns are larger.

Swirling currents may appears as a smooth line like a coastal line.

False Echoes･････････････････････････････････････････････

The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually. These

false echoes appear by the following caused that are well known:

[I] Shadow

When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that exists in the

direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is

reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some false echoes due to shadows can be

checked by monitoring the sea clutter returns, in which there may be a part of weak or no returns.

Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should have in mind in

radar operation.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

6-4

６

[II] Side Lobe Effect

A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on

the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo

appears independent. (See Fig. 6.3)

Fig. 6.3

[III] False Echo by Secondary Reflection

When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar

display. One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the

secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction as shown in Fig.

6.4.

Direct micro wave

Radar scanner

Funnel

Secondary reflection

of micro wave

Actual target

False echo from

funnel

HL

Fig. 6.4

[IV] False Echo by Multiple Reflection

When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in Fig.

6.5, multiple reflection returns may appear on the radar display. These echoes appear in the

same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target.

HL

Fig. 6.5

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

6-5

６

[V] Abnormal Propagation

The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and the height of a

target as described in the section of “The Horizon for Radar Beam Radiation”. If a so-called

“duct” occurs on the sea surface due to a certain weather condition, however, the radar beam may

propagate to an abnormally long distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.

For instance, assuming that the radar range is 6 NM (on the repetition frequency of 1100 Hz), the

first pulse is reflected from a target at about 76 NM or more and received during the next pulse

repetition time. In this case, a false echo appears at a position that is about 76 NM shorter than

the actual distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance of

the target is 5 + 76 = 81 NM. On the radar range scale of 1.5 NM (on the repetition frequency of

1900 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 43 NM shorter than the actual

distance.

This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the repetition

frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.

[VI] Radar Interface

When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship is near own

ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display. This interference pattern

consists of a number of spots which appear in various forms. These spots do not always appear

at the same places, so that they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig. 6.6)

Fig. 6.6

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

6-6

６

 When the radar is set as in ① to ⑥ above to detect the SART signal, the targets

around own ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to

exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by visual watch in

order to avoid any collision or stranding.

If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship, use one set of 9

GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal and operate others as normal

radars for monitoring targets around own ship, checking on own ship’s position

and avoidance of stranding.

After end of detecting the SART signal, it is necessary to readjust the radar fo

r

normal navigation.

Display of Radar Transponder (SART)･･････････････････････

The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized by the GMDSS

(Global Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for locating survivors in case that a

distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band.

When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the radar equipment

on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of response signals to inform the

distress position to the rescue and search party.

The SART position can be displayed on the radar video by setting the radar as follows:

 Radar range scale: 6 NM or 12 NM

 Sea clutter control: Minimum (Most counterclockwise)

 AUTO SEA function: OFF

 TUNE control: No tuning (to weaken clutter echoes)

 Interference rejector (IR): OFF

 PROCESS: OFF

[Example of Display]

Attention

Land

SART code

Position of SART

Position of the rescue craft

Other ships

SECTION 7

MAINTENANCE

7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................7-1

7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT .......................... 7-2

Scanner NKE-1079/1075A/1089/1087 ..............................7-2

Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3037A/3028...........7-4

Display Unit NCD-4263..................................................... 7-5

Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-SA)..........................................7-5

Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)................................... 7-6

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

7-1

７

Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the

equipment by a user.

Inspection or repair work by unauthorized person may cause a

fire or an electric shock.

Ask your nearest branch, business office or a dealer for

inspection and repair.

Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.

Otherwise, an electric shock may result.

WARNING

7.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the

maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will

reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work as often as possible.

Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follows:

Clean the equipment

Remove the dust, dirt and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry

cloth.

Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

7-2

７

Turn off the main power source before starting maintenance.

Otherwise, an electric shock or injury may result.

Set the Safety Switch for Stopping the Scanner to cents [OFF].

Otherwise, an accidental contact with the rotating scanner may

result in injury.

Otherwise, an electric shock may result.

WARNING

7.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT

Scanner NKE-1079/1075/1089/1087･････････････････････････

After finishing the maintenance work, set the safety switch for stopping the scanner to

“ON”.

Precautions on Mounting the Cover

When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted

after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following

precautions:

(a) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N•cm (120 to 150

kgf•cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects the packings against

permanent compressive strain).

The packings start producing from the cover at the torque of approximately 1470

N•cm (150 kgf•cm) or more.

Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the

screws may be broken.

(b) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm × 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of 13 mm × 17

mm (not longer than 200 mm).

(c) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in

order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required

torque at the first step.)

*: Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

7-3

７

 If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke, salt, dust, paint o

r

birds’ droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and

try to keep it clean at all times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate

or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.

 Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichlorethylene and ketone for cleaning.

Otherwise, the radiation plane may deteriorate.

(1) Radiator

Check up and clean the radiator.

Attention

Bolt (stainless steel)4-M8 Bolt (stainless steel)8-M8

Proper Tightening Torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm

Proer Tightening Torque : 120 to 150kgf/c

m

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Cover of NKE-1089

Bolt Tightening Procedure

Cover of NKE-1079

Bolt Tightening Procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

7-4

７

(2) Scanner Mechanism

(a) Supply Oil Seal

When there is not a grease nipple, the replenishment of grease oil is

unnecessary.

Remove the cap of the grease nipple on the front of the S band radiator support

and supply it with a grease gun. Make the oiling every six months. The oil

quantity shall be approximately 100 g that is as much as the grease comes out

of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 or EP2 of Mobil Oil.

(b) Oiling gears

Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the

encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Greasing in short intervals is

more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service

life, but grease those at least every six months. Use Mobilux2 or EP2 of

Mobile Oil.

(c) Mounting legs

Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the scanner unit case on

corrosion sometimes and keep them in order not to cause any danger. Apply

paint to them once a half year because painting is the best measure against

corrosion.

Transmitter-receiver Unit NTG-3037/3028･････････････

Wipe dust on the transmitter and receiver sections with a piece of dry cloth or

feather.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

7-5

７

Do not wipe the radar display surface strongly with a piece of dry

cloth or do not use gasoline or thinner for cleaning. Otherwise,

the display surface may be damaged.

WARNING

Do not give strong impact to the coaxial cable by hitting it with

any tool or hammer.

Otherwise, it may be broken.

Do not put any heavy article on the coaxial cable. Otherwise, it

may be broken.

Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable. Otherwise, it may be

broken.

WARNING

Display Unit NCD-4263････････････････････････････････････

Dust accumulated on the radar display will reduce clarity and darken the video. For

cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton). Do not wipe it strongly

with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.

Coaxial Cable (JMA-9933-SA)･･････････････････････････････

(1) The coaxial pipe gland of the coaxial cable will be provided with perfect water-tight

treatment at the time of installation. Check it and ensure that not water leak occurs

from the connection parts. In particular it is recommended to apply paint to the

coaxial pipe gland every six months.

(2) For further details, refer to the Coaxial Cable Connection Procedures for the S band

Radar.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

7-6

７

 Connect the wave guide properly with no gaps. Otherwise, such gaps ma

y

cause water leaks or corrosion later.

Wave Guide (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)･･････････････････････････

Attention

SECTION 8

COUNTERMEASURES FOR

TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT

8.1 FUNCTION CHECK ......................................................8-1

Function Check on Test Menu .........................................8-2

List of Alarms and other Indications.............................8-14

8.2

TROUBLESHOOTING................................................8-17

8.3

COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE ......................8-18

8.4

REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS.........................8-24

Replacement of PARTS Periodically…………………..8-26

Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor..................8-32

8.5

ADJUSTMENTS..........................................................8-33

Tuning Adjustment..........................................................8-34

Bearing Adjustment ........................................................8-35

Range Adjustment ..........................................................8-36

Antenna Height Adjustment...........................................8-37

Vector Constant...............................................................8-38

Quantization Level ..........................................................8-39

Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log ...8-40

Main Bang Suppression Adjustment ............................8-42

8.6

SETTING .....................................................................8-44

True Bearing Setting.......................................................8-44

Ship Speed Setting .........................................................8-45

Navigation Equipment Setting.......................................8-47

Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting.......................8-48

Time/Day Display Setting ...............................................8-50

Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)........8-52

Adjustment of Inter switch ...........................................8-54

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-1

８

8.1 FUNCTION CHECK

Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it

immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no

trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking,

which can be used effectively in the next check work.

Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8.1 Function Check List in the order as

specified in it.

Table 8.1 Function Check List

Equipment Check Item Criteria Remarks

Transmitter-

receiver Unit

Tuning LED of Receiver The LED is lighting during

operation

48 NM range

Video and echoes on the

screen

Sensitivity

CRT brilliance can be

controlled correctly

Various markers

Various numerical

indications

Lighting

Can be correctly controlled

Safety switch and various

currents and voltages

(1) Refer to Check of Safety

Switch, Various Currents

and Voltages, and Signals.

Communication lines (2) Refer to Check of

Peripheral Units.

Panel (3) Refer to Check of Panel.

ARPA (4) Refer to Check of ARPA.

Magnetron current (5) Refer to Check of

Magnetron Current.

Performance Monitor (6) Refer to Check of

Performance Monitor.

Error Logging Display (7) Refer to Check of Error

Logging Display.

Display Unit

System Information Display (8) Refer to System

Information Display.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-2

８

Procedures

Function Check on Test Menu･･････････････････････････････

The function status of this radar equipment can be checked on the TEST Menu.

1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Left-click at any test item.

A click of the left mouse button at any test item displays detailed information on

the selected test item.

(1) Check of Memory, Safety Switch, Various

Currents and Voltages, and

Communication Lines

(2) Check of Panel

(3) Check of ARPA

(4) Check of Magnetron Current

(5) Check with Performance Monitor

(6) Error Logging Display

(7) System Information Display

1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

EXIT

TEST MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.MAG　CURRENT

5.PM

6.

7.

SELF CHECK

PANEL TEST

ARPATEST

ERROR LOGGING

SYSTEM INFO

OFF ON

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-3

８

Procedures

1 SELF CHECK

1-1 SENSOR

1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Click SELF CHECK .

The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.

3 Click SENSOR .

The SENSOR Menu will appear.

4 Check OK on each item.

If any item is no good, NG will be selected.

In the standby mode, ** will be selected for VIDEO.

If the safety switch on the scanner is OFF, OFF will be selected.

Scanner Rotation Signal

Safety Switch on the Scanner

Ship's Heading Line Signal

Load Current of High Voltage in Modulator

Radar Trigger Signal

Radar Video

Fan 1

Fan 2

1 Click EXIT .

The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

EXIT

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

* SAFETY SWITCH

* AZI PULSE

SELF CHECK

SENSOR

OK

* HL PULSE

OK

* MH CURRENT

* TRIGGER

* VIDEO

* FAN1

* FAN2

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-4

８

Procedures

1-2 LINE CHECK

1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Click SELF CHECK .

The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.

3 Click LINE CHECK .

The LINE CHECK Menu will appear.

4 Check whether each communication line is connected.

・When the device is connected: CONNECT

・When the device is not connected: DISCONNECT

・When the not recognition: ＊＊＊＊＊

Transmitter-receiver Unit

Signal Processing Circuit

ARPA Processing Circuit

Serial Interface Circuit

NSK Unit

Interswitch (Option)

Navigation Equipment 1

Navigation Equipment 2

2-axis Log

1 Click EXIT .

The SELF CHECK Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will reappear.

3 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

EXIT

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

* MTR

* SIG.PROC.

SELF CHECK

LINE CHECK

CONNECT

* ARPA

* SERI I/F

* NSK

* ISW

* NAV1

CONNECT

* NAV2

* 2AXIS

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-5

８

1-3 MONITOR CHECK

Keep off condition.

This function is useful for monitor adjustment with service man.

NOTE: Keep off condition.

If the test pattern of the monitor is displayed, it can be returned to the

previous screen with "OPTION2" or by left-clicking the mouse.

2 PANEL TEST

2-1 KEY

Refer to (2) Checking panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

1 Click the TEST on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear.

2 Click PANEL TEST .

The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.

3 Click KEY .

“1.KEY” is set and the control panel

diagram will appear on the display.

When a key on the control panel of the

actual equipment is pressed, the portion

corresponding to the pressed key in the

panel diagram will turn the color.

1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be finished.

2 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

1.

2.

PANEL TEST

KEY

BUZZER

3.

LAMP

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-6

８

2-2 BUZZER

Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

1 Click the TEST on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear.

2 Click PANEL TEST .

The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.

3 Click BUZZER .

The BUZZER Menu will appear. A beep of

the buzzer indicates that the operation is

normal..

1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

2-3 LAMP

Refer to (2) Checking Panel in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

1 Click the TEST on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear.

2 Click PANEL TEST .

The PANEL TEST Menu will appear.

3 Click LAMP .

The LAMP Menu will appear. The key

backlight is turned on, the operation is

normal.

1 Click TEST .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Note: When performing a LAMP test, the operation cannot be checked if the

Procedures

Exit

Procedures

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

1.

2.

PANEL TEST

KEY

BUZZER

3.

LAMP

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

1.

2.

PANEL TEST

KEY

BUZZER

3.

LAMP

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-7

８

brilliance level of the key backlight is at maximum. (The brilliance will not

change)

3 ARPA TEST

3-1 SIMULATOR

Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

1 Press to set the standby

mode.

2 Click the TEST on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear.

3 Click RPA TEST.

The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

4 Click SIMULATOR .

“1.SIMULATOR”will be selected and the

pull-down menu will appear.

5 Select any setting item of ARPA

Simulator in the pull-down menu

and press any of 1 to 7.

6 Press to set the transmission mode.

1 Click TESE .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Note: In normal operation, it is necessary to turn off the "SIMULATOR".

Procedures

Exit

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

2.TEST VIDEO

ARPA TEST

1.OFF

3.

STATUS

1.SIMULATOR

1.OFF

2.VDG

3.VDH

4.VDL

5.VDIN

1.OFF

TX

STBY

TX

STBY

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-8

８

3-2 TEST VIDEO

Refer to (3) Checking ARPA in Section 8.1.1 Function Check on Test Menu.

1 Press to set the standby

mode .

2 Click the TEST on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear.

3 Click ARPA TEST .

The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

4 Click TEST VIDEO .

2.TEST VIDEO will be selected and the

pull-down menu will appear.

5 Select any setting item in the

pull-down menu and press any of 0

to 7 numbers.

6 Press to set the transmission mode.

1 Click TEST .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Procedures

Exit

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

2.TEST VIDEO

ARPA TEST

1.OFF

3.

STATUS

1.SIMULATOR

1.OFF

2.VDG

3.VDH

4.VDL

5.VDIN

1.OFF

TX

STBY

TX

STBY

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-9

８

Procedures

3-3 STATUS

1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Click ARPA TEST .

The ARPA TEST Menu will appear.

3 Click STATUS .

The STATUS Menu will appear to indicate the ARPA setting values and

conditions.

Vector Constant

(Refer to Vector Constant in Section 8.5

ADJUSTMENTS)

Quantization Level in Automatic Acquisition

(Refer to Quantization Level in Section

8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)

Quantization Level on medium and Short

Ranges (Refer to Quantization Level in

Section

8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)

Quantization Level on Long Range

(Refer to Quantization Level in Section

8.5 ADJUSTMENTS)

Ｇate Size

(Refer to Gate Size in Section 5.10 ARPA

SETTING)

Current Numbers of Targets Under Tracking

1 Click EXIT .

The ARPA TEST Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be reappear.

3 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

EXIT

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

ARPA TEST

STATUS

* CONSTANT

4

* VID LEVEL TD

45

* VID LEVEL HI

40

* VID LEVEL LOW

35

* GATE SIZE

NARROW

* TRACKING

0

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-10

８

Procedures

4 MAG CURRENT

1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Select "ON" radio button of MAG CURRENT .

“ON”in“4.MAG CURRENT”will be set. The magnetron current is displayed

at the bar-graph on the TEST Menu.

Check“5－9.5”in the 24 NM range.

1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

Magnetron current

EXIT

TEST MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.MAG　CURRENT

5.PM

6.

7.

SELF CHECK

PANEL TEST

ARPATEST

ERROR LOGGING

SYSTEM INFO

OFF ON

MAG

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-11

８

TEST MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.MAG　CURRENT

5.PM

6.

7.

SELF CHECK

PANEL TEST

ARPATEST

ERROR LOGGING

SYSTEM INFO

OFF ON

PM

5 PM (Performance Monitor)

Refer to (5) Checking Performance Monitor in Section 8.1.1 Function Check

on Test Menu.

1 Click the TEST on the screen.

The TEST menu will appear.

2 Select "ON" radio button of PM .

If the Performance Monitor is installed,

“ON” in “5.PM” will be set and the status

of

performance monitor will appear by the

[PM] bar-graph in the TEST Menu.

Press 5 again. “5.PM” will be set to “ＯＮ”

and the [PM] indicator in the menu will

disappear.

1 Click EXIT or TEST .

The TEST Menu will be closed. If “5.PM” is

set to “ON”, the status will be set to “OFF”

automatically.

Procedures

Exit

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-12

８

Procedures

6 ERROR LOGGING

If any system error occurs, the communication line in which the error is caused will be

indicated by the selected characters. The errors that are released will also be

indicated in time sequence.

1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Click ERROR LOGGING .

The ERROR LOGGING Menu will appear and the location in which an

error has occurred will appear by selected characters.

.

1 Click EXIT .

The ERROR LOGGING Menu will be closed.

2 Press EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

EXIT

TEST MENU

1.

０．

EXIT

ALL CLEAR

ERROR LOGGING

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-13

８

Procedures

7 SYSTEN INFO

The current system information will be indicated.

1 Click TEST on the screen. Or click OPTION1 key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

2 Click SYSTEM INFO .

The SYSTEM INFORMATION Menu will appear to display the current

system information.

1 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

EXIT

TEST MENU

０．

EXIT

SYSTEM INFO

* INDICATOR

Ver.01.00

* MTR

Ver.02.10

* SYSTEM

Ver.01.00

* TOTAL TIME

2 hours

* TX TIME

1 hours

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-14

８

List of Alarms and other Indications････････････････････････

Table 8.2 List of Gyro Alarms

Message Description

SET GYRO Requires initialization of NSK or setting of initial values for gyro.

TM RESET Own ship’s position has reached at approx. 60% of the radar PPI

radius in the TM mode.

POSN RST Change the latitude and longitude sentence.

Table 8.3 List of ARPA Alarms

Message Description

CPA/TCPA CPA/TCPA of a target (ARPA)

GZ A target approaching own ship exists in a guard zone.

LOST A target under acquisition can not be tracked.

Table 8.4 List of Operational Error Messages and Warnings

Error Message Description

OUT OF RANGE Tried to create a guard zone outside the specified range.

CHANGE RANGE The range is set outside the specified in creating a guard zone.

MAX POINT Tried to enter navigation information beyond the specified.

CAN’T TRANSMIT Tried to transmit within 1 second after standby or when the

transmitter-receiver has any trouble.

MAX MARK Tried to enter more than 20 plot marks.

CAN’T CHANGE Key in with the [+] or [-] at any place where only a numerical value

can be entered.

NO GYRO DATA Any operation requiring Gyro data was made without it.

INVALID DATA Tried to enter any data beyond its range.

NO POSITION DATA Any operation requiring position data was made without it.

CHG REL VECTOR Tried to display a CPA ring in TRUE mode.

MAX TARGET The maximum number of targets (50 targets) is under acquisition.

SELECT STRAIGHT The operator set PM to ON without selecting straight.

NOT ALLOWED Improper operation

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-15

８

Table 8.5 List of Interswitch Alarms and Messages

Error Message Description

MASTER RANGE CHG Tried to change the master range.

ALREADY SELECTED Selected the already selected pattern.

ISW END! The switchover of the Interswitch ended normally.

ISW BUSY! Access to the ISW menu was made during interswitching.

MTR ST-BY! The master MTR is in the standby mode.

ISW STRAIGHT Failed in straight connection when the Interswitch system stops

operating.

ISW STAND-BY! The Interswitch recovered normally.

ISW TIME OUT Communication error occurred between interswitch and display.

ISW ERROR! The interswitch is disabled.

Note:━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

An error message and a warning are displayed at lower right (shown below) in radar

display mode.

VRM1

°

nm

2.20

1.70

EBL1

T 135.0

T 037.0

°

nm

No Alarm

TOKYO

NAV

C

O

VRM2

EBL2

DISPLAY INFO

FUNC3

PANEL

MENU P I GZ TEST

ACK

Display position

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-16

８

Table 8.6 List of System Alarms

Message Description

MTR(AZI) Bearing signal error

MTR(HL) Ship’s heading line signal error

MTR(MHV) Modulator’s high voltage error

MTR(DATA) Communications error with the transmitter-receiver unit

MTR(HEATER) Magnetron heater voltage is abnormal

MTR(REVERSE) Antennal rotation is reversed

MTR STATUS Transceiver status error

SSW OFF The safety switch is OFF during switchover of the scanners

NSK(GYRO) Gyro signal OFF

ISW(DATA) Communications error with the interswitch

LOG Log signal OFF

NAV(DATA) Date from navigation equipment OFF

DLOG 2-axis log signal OFF

ARPA(DATA) Communications error with the ARPA unit

NSK(DATA) Communications error with NSK unit

VIDEO Radar video OFF

TRIGGER Trigger signal OFF

FAN1 Fan alarm 1

FAN2 Fan alarm 2

PROC(DATA) Signal processing circuit error

SERI(DATA) Serial interface circuit error

LAN(DATA) LAN I/F circuit error

232C(DATA) RS-232C communications error

MTR(VID) Abnormal scanner vibrations

MTR(TMP) Abnormal scanner temperature

MAG(HDG) Data from Mag compass have been cut off

PROC(AZI) Bearing pulse is abnormal

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-17

８

8.2 TROUBLESHOOTING

In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there is few cases in which the used

semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration except due to insufficient

design or inspection or by other external and artificial causes. In general, the relatively many causes

are disconnection in a high-value resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor

contact of a switch or relay.

Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning adjustment) or

insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be effective to check and readjust these

points.

Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is necessary to check the

related circuits even if there is no trouble. In this case, note that there is some dispersion in the

fusing characteristics. Table 8.7 shows a list of fuses used in the equipment.

Table 8.7 Fuse List

Location Parts No.

Nominal

Current

Protection Circuit Type

Transmitter-

receiver Unit

F1 1A Rectifier circuit PC1001 MF51NN-1A

Display Unit

(NSK)

F1 to F4 0.5A LOG.NSK circuit PC4201 MF60NR-0.5A

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-18

８

φ5.2

20

8.3 COUNTERMEASURES TO TROUBLE

As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a specialist engineer

for repair or instructions for countermeasure if any circuit is defective.

There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in checking or repair

work.

1 Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables

a) Poor contact in terminal board

b) The cable end is not fully treated, so that it is earthed or contacts with another

terminal.

c) Disconnected cable wire

2 Poor Contact of Connector within Unit

Reference:━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

This radar equipment is provided with the standard spares as shown in

Table 8.8.

Table 8.8 Spares (6ZXRD00198)

Name Type/Code Shape (mm)

In

use

Spare Parts No. Location

Fuse MF51NN-1A

(5ZFAD00042)

1 3 F1 Transmitter-

receiver

PC1001

Fuse MF60NR-0.5A

(5ZFAD00013)

4 12 F1 to F4 Display

NSK Circuit

30

φ6.4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-19

８

Table 8.9 Special Parts

[Ⅰ] JMA-9933-SA

Parts No. Name Type Manufacturer Location Code

V201 Magnetron M1302 NJRC Transmitter-

receiver

5VMAA00032

A201 Circulator NJC3310 NJRC Transmitter-

receiver

5AJBV00002

A202 TRHPL TL378A NJRC Transmitter-

receiver

5VLAA00032

[Ⅱ] JMA-9932-SA

Parts No. Name Type Manufacturer Location Code

V101 Magnetron M1302 NJRC Scanner 5VMAA00032

A101 Circulator NJC3320 NJRC Scanner 5AJBV00004

A303 TRHPL TL378A NJRC Scanner 5VLAA00032

[Ⅲ] JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

Parts No. Name Type Manufacturer Location Code

V1 Magnetron M1568B(J) NJRC Transmitter-

receiver

5VMAA00082

A201/A202 Circulator FCX68 TOSHIBA

CORPORATION

Transmitter-

receiver

6AJRD00001

A203 Diode Limiter NJS6930 NJRC Transmitter-

receiver

5EZAA00024

A302 Pin Attenuator NJS6926 NJRC Transmitter-

receiver

5ENAC00019

[Ⅳ] JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

Parts No. Name Type Manufacturer Location Code

V1 Magnetron M1568B(J) NJRC Scanner 5VMAA00082

A101 Circulator FCX68 TOSHIBA

CORPORATION

Scanner 6AJRD00001

A303 Diode Limiter NJS6930 NJRC Scanner 5EZAA00019

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-20

８

Table 8.10 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9933-SA)

Location Circuit Block Type Remarks

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30030

AC220/230V3φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30110

AC220/230V1φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30092

AC100/110V1φ

Transmitter-

receiver

Modulator NMA-1253-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209)

Excluding Magnetron

Transmitter-

receiver

Receiver NRG-88 PC301(CEA-334-1)

PC302(CEA-424)

PC303(CEA-205)

Including PC304 (CBD-1274)

Transmitter-

receiver

Power supply circuit CBA-1682

Transmitter-

receiver

T/R control circuit CMC-1205

Display Power supply circuit CBD-1661

Display Terminal board circuit CQD-1949

Display NSK/LOG I/F circuit CMJ-462A

Display Mother board CMC-1094

Display Panel circuit-1 CCK-900

Display Panel circuit-2 CCK-901

Display Panel circuit-3 CCK-902

Display Display control circuit CMC-1218

Display Signal processing circuit CDC-1209

Display Interswitch circuit NQE-3141 (Option)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-21

８

Table 8.11 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9932-SA)

Location Circuit Block Type Remarks

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30030

AC220/230V3φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30110

AC220/230V1φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30092

AC100/110V1φ

Transmitter-

receiver

Modulator NMA-534-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209)

Excluding Magnetron

Transmitter-

receiver

Receiver NRG-222 PC301(CEA-334-4)

PC302(CEA-424)

PC303(CEA-205)

Including PC304 (CBD-1274)

Transmitter-

receiver

Power supply circuit CBA-1682

Transmitter-

receiver

T/R control circuit CMC-1205

Display Power supply circuit CBD-1661

Display Terminal board circuit CQD-1949

Display NSK/LOG I/F circuit CMJ-462A

Display Mother board CMC-1094

Display Panel circuit-1 CCK-900

Display Panel circuit-2 CCK-901

Display Panel circuit-3 CCK-902

Display Display control circuit CMC-1218

Display Signal processing circuit CDC-1209

Display Interswitch circuit NQE-3141 (Option)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-22

８

Table 8.12 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9923-7XA/9XA)

Location Circuit Block Type Remarks

Scanner Motor with gear MDBW10645

AC220/230V3φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30177

AC220/230V1φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30176

AC100/110V1φ

Transmitter-

receiver

Modulator NMA-1252-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209)

Excluding Magnetron

Transmitter-

receiver

Receiver NRG-98

Transmitter-

receiver

Power supply circuit CBA-1682

Transmitter-

receiver

T/R control circuit CMC-1205

Display Power supply circuit CBD-1661

Display Terminal board circuit CQD-1949

Display NSK/LOG I/F circuit CMJ-462A

Display Mother board CMC-1094

Display Panel circuit-1 CCK-900

Display Panel circuit-2 CCK-901

Display Panel circuit-3 CCK-902

Display Display control circuit CMC-1218

Display Signal processing circuit CDC-1209

Display Interswitch circuit NQE-3141 (Option)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-23

８

Table 8.13 Repair Circuit Block (JMA-9922-6XA/9XA)

Location Circuit Block Type Remarks

Scanner Motor with gear MDBW10645

AC220/230V3φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30177

AC220/230V1φ

Scanner Motor with gear MPEM30176

AC100/110V1φ

Transmitter-

receiver

Modulator NMA-499-1 Including PC210 (CPA-209)

Excluding Magnetron

Transmitter-

receiver

Receiver NRG-154

Transmitter-

receiver

Power supply circuit CBA-1682

Transmitter-

receiver

T/R control circuit CMC-1205

Display Power supply circuit CBD-1661

Display Terminal board circuit CQD-1949

Display NSK/LOG I/F circuit CMJ-462A

Display Mother board CMC-1094

Display Panel circuit-1 CCK-900

Display Panel circuit-2 CCK-901

Display Panel circuit-3 CCK-902

Display Display control circuit CMC-1218

Display Signal processing circuit CDC-1209

Display Interswitch circuit NQE-3141 (Option)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-24

８

In this INTER-SWITCH system, even if it turns OFF

a Indicator power supply, the power supply may

be supplied to the scanner.

Turn off the main power source of the radar before

open the scanner unit.

DENGER

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-25

８

Turn off the main power source before replacing parts. Otherwise, an

electric shock or injury may result.

Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main power source and wait for

5 minutes or more until the high voltage circuits are discharged.

Otherwise, an electric shock may result.

Take off your wrist watch when bringing your hands close to the magnetron.

Since the magnetron is a strong magnet, your wrist watch may be damaged

if not taken off.

Replacement of the LCD unit requires two persons.

If one person attempts replacing the LCD unit, he/she may drop it and get

injured.

High voltage will temporarily remain inside, even after the main power has

been turned off. Do not touch the inverter circuit of the LCD unit with wet

hands.

Failure to observe this precaution may result in electrical shock.

CAUTION

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-26

８

Replacement of PARTS Periodically･････････････････････

The parts shown below, it is need to exchang periodically.

Replacement of Magnetron (V1/V101/V201)･･････････････････

Remove the shield cover of the modulator and check that no charge remains in the

high-voltage modulator circuit. Then, remove the socket of the magnetron. The

magnetron can be demounted by removing the screws fixing it. When mounting a

new magnetron, do not touch the magnet with a screwdriver or put it on an iron place.

After replacement, connect the lead wire correctly.

Handling of Magnetron under Long-Time Storage

The magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and

operate unstably when its operation is started. Perform the aging in the following

procedures:

(1) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes in the

STBY state.)

(2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift is gradually to the longer

pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable during this process, return it to

the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until the

operation is restarted.

(3) After transmission is made for about 15 minutes, conduct the tuning adjustment.

(4) Adjust RV1 within the receiver so that the bar graph of the tuning indicator on the

display reaches the reading 10 without saturation.

Parts Exchange Standard

1. Magnetron 4,000 hours

2. Motor 10,000 hours

3. LCD 50,000 hours

4. Fan Motor 20,000 hours

5. Lithium battery 3 years

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-27

８

< Scanner: NKE-1075A Magnetron Exchange Procedure

Magnetron

Open portside cover.

Headin

g

Bolt A

Magnetron

Attached Plate

・Remove the reads of magnetron on

terminal.

・Loosen 9 bolts A.

And remove 2 attached plates.

Caution）

Be careful of the handling of a

magnetron.

・Exchange Magnetron.

Attach Magnetron, plates, reads.

Setting up scanner unit

.

Terminal

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-28

８

< Scanner: NKE-1087 Magnetron Exchange Procedure

Heading

Open starboard cover of

scanner.

Loosen 4 screws A.

And remove

magnetron-cover.

Screw: A

Remove Magnetron-cover

Screw

:

B

・Remove Magnetron-leads at the

terminal.

・Remove 4 screws B.

Remove The Magnetron.

Caution）

Be careful of the handling of a

magnetron and screws.

・Exchange Magnetron.

A

ttach Magnetron, leads and

cover.

Setting up scanner unit.

Terminal

Magnetron

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-29

８

< Transmitter Receiver: NTG-3037A Magnetron Exchange Procedure

・Remove outer-cover.

・Loosen 6 screws A.

・Remove inner cover.

Inner cover

Screw:A

Terminal

Bolt: B

・

Remove Magnetron leads

from terminal.

・Remove 9 bolts B.

Remove Magnetron.

・Exchange Magnetron.

A

ttach Magnetron, leads

and cover.

Setting up TR control

unit.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-30

８

< Transmitter Receiver: NTG-3028 Magnetron Exchange Procedure

Screw: B

Screw: C

Screw: B

Screw: C

Remove outer cover.

Loosen screw A.

And slide and remove

attach plate.

Loosen 4 screws B

about 4-5 turns.

The pin falls.

When pin is not fall, push

the pin by Philips.

Screw: A

Attach plate

Modulator

Screw: C

Remove 4 screws C.

Pulls out rotating Modulator

in the direction of an arrow

for a while.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-31

８

Termial

Magnetron

Remove Magnetron cover.

Remove Magnetron leads

on the terminal.

Screw: D

Loosen 4 screws D.

Remove the Magnetron.

Exchange the Magnetron.

Attach the leads and cover.

Setting up TR control

unit.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-32

８

z The liquid-crystal monitor is easily damaged, even by a slight shock. When

handling this monitor for replacement, be extra careful so as not to hit a hard

object against the monitor. In addition, do not place the monitor on a hard

object.

Replacement of the Liquid-Crystal Monitor････････････････

1 JMA-9933-SA, JMA-9923-7XA/9XA (Display unit: NCD-4263)

(1) Four screws of the front of a processing part are loosened.

(2) The cable connected from the liquid crystal (LCD) part is removed. (Three)

The band which is fixing the cable is removed.

A cable is drawn out upwards.

(3) Four bolts which have stopped the liquid crystal display part to the case are

removed..

(4) A display part is removed.

(5) Four screws of a liquid crystal top and six screws (rotation part) stopped from the

lower side are removed. (It becomes only the display part of liquid crystal.)

(6) A reverse procedure performs attachment of a new liquid crystal display monitor.

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-33

８

Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized

service persons. Otherwise, an accident or trouble may result.

Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar

performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble.

CAUTION

Procedures

8.5 ADJUSTMENTS

This section describes the electrical adjustments of the equipment as the

adjustment procedures to be carried out by service persons at the time

of installation.

Tuning adjustments, bearing adjustments, and range adjustments can be performed from

the keyboard.

The following procedure must be used to enter the equipment into adjustment mode:

1 Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click CODE INPUT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

3 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The TEST Menu will be closed.

ADJUST

1.TUNE

2.BEARING

０．

EXIT

0-127

1.5

3.CPA RING

4.ANTENNA HEIGH

0.0-359.9゜

10

ARPA/AIS

5.

000.0

0-999

SECTOR BLANK

MBS

6.

7.

3.OVER 25m

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-34

８

Procedures

ADJUST

1.TUNE

2.BEARING

０．

EXIT

0-127

1.5

3.CPA RING

4.ANTENNA HEIGH

0.0-359.9゜

10

ARPA/AIS

5.

000.0

0-999

SECTOR BLANK

MBS

6.

7.

3.OVER 25m

Tuning Adjustment･･････････････････････････････････

1 If the AUTO TUNE mode is ON, change the mode to the Manual

mode.

2 Set the range scale to 24 NM and

adjust the [TUNE] control to the

center.

3 Click MENU on the screen. Or

press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

4 Click CODE INPUT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

5 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

6 Click the “1.TUNE”edit box.

The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

7 Using △ and ▽ , adjust the bar-graph of the tuning

indicator on the upper left of the display so that it becomes

the longest, and press END to set it.

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-35

８

Procedures

Bearing Adjustment･･･････････････････････････････････････

Adjust the bearing so that bearing of the target measured with the ship’s compass

corresponds to that of the target echo on the radar display.

1 Press the “N UP/H UP/C UP” button on the upper left of the

screen, then change the bearing display to relative display

(H UP) .

2 Measure the bearing of an adequate target (for example, a ship

at anchor, a breakwater or a buoy) relative to own ship’s

heading. (For instance, assume that the bearing of the target

is 25°.)

3 Click MENU on the screen. Or press

OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

4 Click CODE INPUT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

5 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

6 Click the “2.BEARING”edit box.

2.BEARING will be selected.

7 The EBL for bearing adjustment will appear.

Rotate the [EBL] control and adjust EBL to the target selected

in Step 2 above.

Press [EBL] control to set it.

8 Rotate the [EBL] control and adjust the EBL for bearing

adjustment to the bearing of the target selected in Step 2

above.

Press [EBL] control to set it.

(Adjust the EBL bearing to 25°as the instance in Step 2 above)

9 Repeat the procedures from step 5 above if the bearing is not

completely coincident with the target's actual bearing.

ADJUST

1.TUNE

2.BEARING

０．

EXIT

0-127

1.5

3.CPA RING

4.ANTENNA HEIGH

0.0-359.9゜

10

ARPA/AIS

5.

000.0

0-999

SECTOR BLANK

MBS

6.

7.

3.OVER 25m

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-36

８

Procedures

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

Range Adjustment･････････････････････････････････････････

Adjust the range that the range of the target on the radar video is indicated correctly.

1 Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click CODE INPUT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

3 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

4 Click the “3.RANGE”edit box.

3.RANGE will be selected.

5 Find a target on the radar display the

range of which is already known.

（For example, assume that the actual range of

the target is 0.33NM)

6 Using + and - , adjust the target echo's position to the

position of the target selected in step 4 above. Press END to

set it.

Move the target echo upward by + and downward by - .

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

ADJUST

1.TUNE

2.BEARING

０．

EXIT

0-127

1.5

3.CPA RING

4.ANTENNA HEIGH

0.0-359.9゜

10

ARPA/AIS

5.

000.0

0-999

SECTOR BLANK

MBS

6.

7.

3.OVER 25m

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-37

８

Procedures

ADJUST

1.TUNE

2.BEARING

０．

EXIT

0-127

1.5

3.CPA RING

4.ANTENNA HEIGH

0.0-359.9゜

10

ARPA/AIS

5.

000.0

0-999

SECTOR BLANK

MBS

6.

7.

3.OVER 25m

1.UNDER 15m

2.15m-25m

3.OVER 25m

Antenna Height Adjustment････････････････････････････････

Set the height of the antenna above the sea level.

Do not change this setting inadvertently.

1 Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click CODE INPUT.

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

3 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

4 Click the “4.ANTENNA HEIGHT”edit

box.

4.ANTENNA HEIGHT will be selected.

5 Measure the height from the sea

surface to the top of the antenna,

then select the corresponding

antenna height from the pull-down

menu.

The selected antenna height value will be set.

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-38

８

Procedures

z Do not change the set value carelessly.

The vector constant shall be set to 4 normally. If the vector constant value is

higher, a target’s vector will be better followed up when the target and own ship

change their course or speed, but the vector accuracy will be lower on the

Vector Constant･･･････････････････････････････････････････

1 Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click CODE INPUT.

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

3 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

4 Click ARPA/AIS .

The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.

5 Click the “1. VECT CONST”edit box.

1.VECT CONST will be selected.

6 Input the new value by pressing the 0

to 8 number buttons or by using the + or - buttons, then

press END to input.

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

Attention

EXIT

ARPA/AIS

ADJUST

０．

EXIT

3.LIMIT RING

VIDEO LEVEL

1-8

1.VECT CONST

4

OFF ON

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-39

８

Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If the level deviates

from the proper value, the ARPA acquisition and tracking functions will

deteriorate.

Otherwise, this may cause accidents to occur.

CAUTION

Procedures

Quantization Level･････････････････････････････････････････

The quantization level determines the minimum signal level of the input video to the ARPA

target detection circuit. In this test, the value of the quantization level can be set in a

range of 1 to 63.

If the value is set to a lower level, weak target echoes will be inputted to the ARPA target

detection circuit, but much radar noise will also be inputted to the circuit together, and

target acquisition and tracking may be disabled. Therefore, it is important to set a value

that is 4 or 5 higher than the detected noise level.

1 Click MENU on the screen. Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click CODE INPUT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

3 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

4 Click ARPA/AIS .

The ARPA/AIS Menu will appear.

5 Click VIDEO LEVEL .

The VIDEO LEVEL Menu will appear.

6 Click the “3.HIGH LEVEL”edit box.

3.HIGH LEVEL will be selected.

ARPA/AIS

ADJUST

０．

EXIT

3.HIGH LEVEL

1-63

VIDEO LEVEL

45

1.TD LEVEL

2.LOW LEVEL

1-63

35

1-63

40

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-40

８

7 To change the quantization level, enter a new value using any

of 0 to 9 or + and - , and press END to set it.

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

Control will be returned to the MAIN Menu.

Do not change the quantization level LOW LEVEL.

Adjustment of NSK Unit to Gyro Compass and Log･･････････

The NSK Unit of the radar equipment is of solid-state type and designed to be compatible

with almost all types of gyro compass by switch operation (For the step motor type, 35 V

DC to 100 V DC, and for the synchro-motor type, the primary excitation voltage is 50 V AC

to 115 V AC). Before power-on operation, the switches S1, S2, S6 and S7 on the NSK

Unit (CMJ-462) shall be set to the type of gyro compass in use in accordance with the

procedures as described below. The gyro select switch on the NSK Unit is set to the

gyration ratio of 360X and to be compatible with the synchro type before delivery from

factory. Check the type of the gyro compass used in own ship and make settings in the

procedures below. For further details, refer to Fig. 127 Setting Table of Gyro Compass

and Gyro Select Switches of Display Unit, Type NCD-4263.

① Set the switches and jumper of the NSK Unit (CMJ-462) before tuning on the radar

equipment.

• S5: Set it to [OFF].

• S6, 7: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.

S6, S7･･･････････････｢UP｣･････････ Step signal

｢DOWN｣･････ Synchro signal

• S1-1 to 4: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of gyro.

S1-1･･････････････････ Set this switch assembly according to the

particular type of gyro.

｢UP｣･････････ Step signal

｢DOWN｣･････ Synchro signal

S1-2, 3････････････････ Gyration ratio

Gyration ratio S1-2 S1-3

36×

ON ON

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-41

８

90×

OFF ON

180×

ON OFF

360×

OFF OFF

S1-4･･････････････････ Gyration direction

｢ON｣･････････ Reverse (counterclockwise)

｢OFF｣････････ Normal (clockwise)

• S1-5-8: Set this switch assembly according to the particular type of log.

S1-5･･････････････････ Log type-1

｢ON｣･････････ Synchro signal

｢OFF｣････････ Pulse signal

S1-6･･････････････････ Log type-2

｢ON｣･････････ 1-axis

｢OFF｣････････ 2-axis

S1-7,8････････････････ Log ratio

Log ratio S1-7 S1-8

100P/30×

ON ON

200P/90×

OFF ON

400P/180×

ON OFF

800P/360×

OFF OFF

②

Connect the gyro signal and the log signal cables to the Terminal Board Circuit.

③

Set S7 to [ON].

After power-on operation, the switch S1-4 shall be set to [ON] if the radar video and

the indicated value of COPURSE (own ship’s true bearing) is reversed.

Table 8.14 Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 Dip Switch)

S1 Setting Table

S１

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STEP TYPE ON

SYNC TYPE OFF

36×

ON ON

90×

OFF ON

180×

ON OFF

RATIO

360×

ON OFF

REV (Reverse) ON

GYRO

SIG.

/

GYRO

SIGNAL

SET

DIRECTION

NORM (Normal) OFF

SYNC ON

TYPE1

PULSE OFF

１AXIS

ON

TYPE2

２AXIS

OFF

LOG SIG.

/

LOG

SIGNAL

SET

PULSE

100P/30×

ON ON

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-42

８

Procedures

z Do not change the adjusted level carelessly. If the adjustment is improper, the

target signals on the short ranges may be cleared.

200P/90×

OFF ON

400P/180×

ON OFF

/NM

800P/360×

OFF OFF

S2 Setting Table

1 2 3 4

LOG ALM

GYRO

SIMULATOR

LOG

SIMULATOR

N/A

5 6 7 8

S2

GYRO ALM

ON=5S,OFF=0.5S

N/A N/A N/A

Main Bang Suppression Adjustment････････････････････････

The adjustment is intended for suppressing the main bang that is an echo signal from the

microwave circuit such as waveguide appearing as a circular echo at the radar video

center. It is the optimum level in which the main bang suppression is adjusted so that the

main bang remains weak on the video.

1 Set the radar range scale to the minimum 0.125 NM, set

PROCESS, TGT ENH and FUNCTION to OFF, and set the

system to the Transmit mode.

2 Adjust the operation controls as

follows:

[GAIN] control: Maximum

[SEA] control: Center (MANUAL)

[RAIN] control: Minimum (MANUAL)

3 Click MENU on the screen.

Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

4 Click CODE INPUT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

Attention

ADJUST

０．

EXIT

00-255

MBS

1.MBS LEVEL

2.MBS AREA

0-255

0

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-43

８

5 3 Click 0 , then END .

The ADJUST Menu will appear.

6 Click MBS .

The MBS Menu will appear.

7 Click the “1.MBS LEVEL” edit box.

1.MBS LEVEL will be selected.

8 Enter any value to adjust the suppression range using 0 to 9

or + and - , and press END to set it up.

9 Click “2.MBS AREA” edit box in the state of step 5.

2.MBS AREA will be selected.

10 Enter any value to adjust the

suppression level using 0 to 9 or +

and - , and press END to set it up.

1 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The ADJUST Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The CODE INPUT Menu will be closed.

4 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

ADJUST

０．

EXIT

00-255

MBS

1.MBS LEVEL

2.MBS AREA

0-255

0

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-44

８

Procedures

8.6 SETTING

True Bearing Setting･･･････････････････････････････････････

Adjust the bearing that the bearing angle of the radar is the same as that of the gyro.

1 Click MENU on the screen.

Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU , then

SETTING1 .

The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

3 Click in the “GYRO SETTING” edit

box.

The GYRO SETTING edit box will be

selected.

4 Enter any value using 0 to 9 or + and - to adjust the

radar bearing to the gyro bearing, and press END to set it up.

1 Click EXIT .

The SUB1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The SUB1 Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

SUB1 MENU

1.SET GYRO

０．

EXIT

0.0

0.0-359.9゜

SETTING2

SET MANUAL SPEED

3.

SELECT NAV

SET/DRIFT

4.

7.PRF

SETTING1

2.SELECT SPEED

5.

TIME/DAY

6.

1.HIGH

1.MANUAL

8.RANGE SELECT

96nm 120nm

9.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-45

８

Procedures

Ship Speed Setting････････････････････････････････････････

The ship’s speed and various other related values, and manual speed can be set.

1 Click MENU on the screen.

Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 .

The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

3 Click the “2.SELECT SPEED” edit box.

The SPEED edit box will be selected.

4-1 Manual Speed Setting

(1) Click MANUAL .

1.MANUAL will be set.

(2) Click SET MANUAL SPEED after step 2

above is completed.

The SET MANUAL SPEED Menu will appear.

(3) Click the“1.MANUAL SPEED”edit box.

The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

(4) Press any of 0 to 9 or + and -

and press END.

The speed (max. 100.0 kts) will be set.

Note: The manually entered speed is effective only when MANUAL

is set in SELECT SPEED.

SUB1 MENU

1.SET GYRO

０．

EXIT

0.0

0.0-359.9゜

SETTING2

SET MANUAL SPEED

3.

SELECT NAV

SET/DRIFT

4.

7.PRF

SETTING1

2.SELECT SPEED

5.

TIME/DAY

6.

1.HIGH

1.MANUAL

8.RANGE SELECT

96nm 120nm

9.

1.MANUAL

2.1AXIS

3.2AXIS W

4.2AXIS G

SUB1 MENU

1.MANUAL SPEED

０．

EXIT

30

0-60.0kts

SETTING1

SET MANUAL SPEED

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-46

８

z The speed data cannot be selected when the sentence VBW of NMEA0183

is not entered.

4-2 LOG Setting

(1) Click 1AXIS for 1-axis log.

2.1AXIS will be set.

4-3 Selection of Data against Water for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)

(1) Click 2AXIS W .

3.2AXIS W will be set.

4-3 Selection of Data against Ground for 2-axis Log (NMEA Signal)

(1) Click 2AXIS G .

4.2AXIS G will be set.

1 Click EXIT .

The SUB1 Menu will reappear.

2 Click EXIT .

The SUB1 Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

Attention

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-47

８

Procedures

Navigation Equipment Setting･･････････････････････････････

The data from the navigation equipment such as GPS will be selected.

1 Click MENU on the screen.

Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU , then SETTING1 .

The SETTING1 Menu will appear.

3 Click SELECT NAV .

The SELECT NAV Menu will appear.

4 Click the “1.L/L (GPS)”edit box.

The“1.L/L (GPS)”edit box will be selected.

- When using no navigation

equipment -

5-1 Select and set “NONE” by clicking .

- When using navigation equipment 1 -

5-2 Select and set “NAV1” by clicking .

- When using navigation equipment 1 -

5-3 Select and set “NAV2” by clicking .

1 Click EXIT .

The PORT Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The SETTING Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

SUB1 MENU

1.L/L (GPS)

０．

EXIT

SETTING1

SELECT NAV

1.NONE

2.NAV1

3.NAV2

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-48

８

Procedures

z Setting with this function is valid only when MANUAL or 1AXIS is selected for

ship’s speed setting (SPEED).

Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting･････････････････････

The current set and drift will be set.

1 Click MENU on the screen.

Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU, then STTING1 .

The STTING1 Menu will appear.

3 Click SET/DRIFT .

The SET/DRIFT Menu will appear.

4 Click “1.CORRECTION” to “ON” .

“ON” in “1.CORRECTION” will be set to

operate the current correction mode.

If the current correction mode is not operated, press “1.CORRECTION”to set

it to “ＯＦＦ”．

5 Set “1.CORRECTION” to “ON” and click the “2.SET” edit

box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be opened.

6 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or + and - ,

and press END to set it up.

The current set will be set.

7 Set “1.CORRECTION” to “ON“ and click the “3.DRIFT” edit

box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be opened

Attention

SUB1 MENU

1.CORRECTION

０．

EXIT

SETTING1

SET/DRIFT

OFF ON

2.SET

0.0

0.0-359.9゜

3.DRIFT

0.0

0.0-15.0kts

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-49

８

8 Enter any angle of the current set using 0 to 9 or + or - ,

and press END to set it up.

The current drift will be set.

1 Click EXIT .

The PORT Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The SETTING Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-50

８

Procedures

Time/Day Display Setting･･･････････････････････････････････

In displaying the time, it is necessary to set the LOCAL TIME, LOCAL DATA and GMT +/-.

1 Click MENU on the screen.

Or press OPTION2 key.

The MAIN Menu will appear.

2 Click SUB1 MENU, then STTING1 .

The STTING1 Menu will appear.

3 Click TIME/DAY .

The TIME/DAY Menu will appear.

4 Click “1.UTL/LOCAL” edit box.

The UTL/LOCAL pull-down menu will appear.

- If the time of day is not to be displayed -

5-1 Left-click on “OFF” to select no time display.

- If UTC (Universal Coordinated Time) is to be displayed -

5-2 Left-click on “UTC” to select UTC display.

- If LOCAL (Location Time) is to be displayed -

5-3 Left-click on “UTC” to select local time display.

1) Left-click in the“2.LOCAL TIME”edit

box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be

opened.

2) Enter any local time using 0 to 9 and

press END to set it up.

The LOCAL TIME will be set.

3) Left-click in the“3.LOCAL DATE”edit

box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be

opened.

4) Enter any local date sing 0 to 9 and

press END to set it up.

The LOCAL DATE will be set.

5) Left-click in the“4.GMT + / -”edit box.

The numeric input dialogue box will be

opened.

3.LOCAL DATE

SUB1 MENU

1.UTC/LOCAL

０．

EXIT

SETTING1

2.CPA RING

1999/01/27

4.GMT +/-

1.OFF

TIME/DAY

1.OFF

2.UTC

3.LOCAL

+/- 12:00

0:00

3.LOCAL DATE

SUB1 MENU

1.UTC/LOCAL

０．

EXIT

SETTING1

2.CPA RING

1999/01/27

4.GMT +/-

1.OFF

TIME/DAY

+/- 12:00

0:00

00:00

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-51

８

z Time correction is not available when the “ZDA” sentence of NMEA0183 is

not received.

6) Enter the time difference between the local time and the UTC

using + and - , and press END to set it up.

The“GMT + / -”will be set.

1 Click EXIT .

The TIME/DATE Menu will be closed.

2 Click EXIT .

The SETTING Menu will be closed.

3 Click EXIT .

The MAIN Menu will be closed.

EXIT

Attention

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-52

８

Procedures

Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-63/64)･････････････

1 Set the radar to Master Radar when the Interswitch is

installed.

2 Press to display VRM1 and set the range of VRM1 to

10-18* NM.

* Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when a waveguide is installed between the

scanner unit and the transmitter-receiver unit. (X band radar)

* Set the range to 12 to 18 NM when the transceiver unit is incorporated in

the scanner unit or in case of operating the S band radar.

3 Open the ADJUST Menu as directed in

Section 8.5, Adjustments.

4 Left-click on PM PRESET .

The PM PRESET Menu will appear. The radar

will automatically be set to RM, OFF CNTER

OFF, IR OFF, PROCESS OFF, TGT ENH OFF,

FUNCTION OFF and 24 NM range.

5 Affix the INFORMATION LABEL as

supplied with the Performance Monitor

to a suitable position of the board side

of the Display Unit.

6 Write down the value of the "PM"

indicator in the TEST Menu and the

date of checking in the INFORMATION

LABEL.

4.ANTENNA HEIGHT

ADJUST

1.TUNE

０．

EXIT

5.

8.PM PRESET

3.OVER 25m

0-127 30

320-63

2.BEARING

0.0-359.9°

000.0

3.RANGE

0-999

510

ARPA

ISW

MBS

6.

7.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-53

８

Adjust the PM pattern

using the ten-key or [+]

and [-] so that its outer

edge is within 12 to 18 NM.

(See step 2)

PM Pattern

1 Click EXIT .

The PM PRESET Menu will be closed and the display will return to the

status existing before the tests were conducted.

Note: • All target acquisitions by ARPA functions will be

cancelled.

The target acquisition cancelled when PM is ON will not

be recovered.

• The radar image is suppressed to make the PM image

easier to see.

Therefore, the ADJUST MENU should be always opened

after PM check is completed.

12 to

18 NM

EXIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-54

８

Adjustment of Inter switch ････････････････････････････････

[Checking after Installation]

Turn off the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.

(1) Check that the Interswitch is installed properly after completion of the installation.

In particular, check if the cable is connected correctly and if the shield meshwork of the

cable is grounded properly.

(2) Check that the internal settings in each Display Unit are made adequately.

[Checking the Interswitch Operation]

Turn on the ship's mains (switch board) for the radar equipment.

(1) Checking Interswitch Patterns.

6 interswitch patterns are available for 2-ynits of radar system, and 12 interswitch

patterns are available for 3-units of radar system.

For the checking procedures, refer to the Instruction Manual for Interswitch Kit as

attached hereto.

(2) Checking and adjusting Radar Video

The radar system with the built-in interswitch kit shall be adjusted in the following three

parameters:

・Range adjustment (0 NM adjustment)

・Bearing adjustment

・Rough tuning adjustment

These types of adjustment shall be made for each interswitch pattern as follows:

2-units system ･･･････ No.1 and No.2

3-units system ･･･････ No.1 , No.2 , No.3 and No.12 .

For the method of adjustment, refer to the respective adjustment procedures.

Note: Each adjustment should be performed swiftly after the interswitch is equipped.

These adjustments should be performed on the patterns specified according to the

radar quantity of the system.

If the patterns are switched without adjustments and the radar is used, accurate

information cannot be obtained from the radar.

2-units System

a. Pattern No.1

① Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the Display Unit (right))

② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the

panel of the Display Unit (left))

b. Pattern No.2

① Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the

panel of the Display Unit (right))

② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating the

panel of the Display Unit (left))

3-units System

a. Pattern No.1

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-55

８

① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by

operating the panel of the Display Unit (center))

② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating the

panel of the Display Unit (left))

③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the Display Unit (right))

b. Pattern No.2

① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the Display Unit (center))

② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the Display Unit (left))

③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (right). (Unnecessory

adjustment)

c. Pattern No.3

① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the Display Unit (center))

② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (left). (Unnecessory

adjustment)

③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (center). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the Display Unit (right))

d. Pattern No.12

① Adjustment between the Display Unit (center) and the MTR (center). (Unnecessory

adjustment)

② Adjustment between the Display Unit (left) and the MTR (right). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the display Unit (left))

③ Adjustment between the Display Unit (right) and the MTR (left). (Adjust by operating

the panel of the Display Unit (right))

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

8-56

８

9 アフターサービス

When you Request for Repair .................... 9-1

Recommended Maintenance ..................... 9-1

Radar Failure Check List ............................ 9-2

SECTION 9

AFTER-SALES SERVICE

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

9-1

９

When you Request for Repair ･･････････････････････

If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section8

carefully and check the suspected point again.

If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment and

consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch office in

your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.

● Repair within the Warranty Period

If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with

the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of change. In case that

any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major

such as natural disaster and fine, the product will be repaired with charges.

● Repair after the Warranty Period

It any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it will

be made at your own charge upon your request.

● Necessary Information for Repair

☆ Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number

☆ Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to "Radar Failure Check

List" in page 9-2

☆ Name of company/organization address and telephone number

Recommended Maintenance ･･･････････････････････

The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the

parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of

operation.

So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in addition to your

daily care.

For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.

Such maintenance will be made with changes.

For futher details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices in the list at the end of this

manual.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

9-2

９

Radar Failure Check List

When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could confirm the check items

and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.

If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is installed, and give the correct

information on the product.

Ship name:

Phone: Fax:

Radar general model name: JMA-

Serial No. :

(Write the full model name correctly)

（1） Check the following items in the order of the number, and circle the applicable answer between

YES or NO. If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (18),

others.

（2） If any of the items (1) to (5) if marked as NO, check the fuse of the product (refer to Section 8.2

and 8.3).

（3） Check the items (4) to (17) while the transmission (TX) in ON.

*Function mentioned in the items (14), (15) and (17) may be optional, answer is not necessary.

No. Check Item Result

（1）

Power can be turn on. (The lamp on the operation panel is lit) YES NO

（2）

A few minutes after powering-on, it will become standby status . YES NO

（3）

When powering-on (or TX ON), the LCD displays something (LCD is lit). YES NO

（4）

The scanner rotates at the transmission (TX) ON.

(Check the following items while transmission is ON)

YES NO

（5）

Current is supplied to the magnetron. (Refer to the instruction manual) YES NO

（6）

Tuning is enabled. (Check with the range of 6 NM or more) YES NO

（7）

Fixed marker is displayed. YES NO

（8）

VRM is displayed. YES NO

（9）

While noise is displayed while set at STC and FTC minimum,

GAIN maximum, IR-OFF and range 48 NM.

YES NO

（10）

Target reflection echo is displayed. YES NO

（11）

Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal. YES NO

（12）

EBL is displayed. YES NO

（13）

cursor mark moves. YES NO

*（14）

GYRO course can be set and normally displayed. YES NO

*（15）

LOG speed can be normally displayed. YES NO

（16）

ARPA works normally. YES NO

*（17）

If wquipped with an interswitch, when switching from the straight mode (| |) to

(×), the failures (items marked NO) in the ablve (1) to (16), are switched over to

the other unit.

YES NO

（18）Others (Error message, etc.)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

9-3

９

SECTION 10

DISPOSAL

10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ..................... 1

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES ....... 1

10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ... 1

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

10-1

１０

When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to

insulate the batteries by taping the + and −

terminals.

Otherwise, heat

g

eneration, explosion or a fire ma

y

occur.

WARNING

10.1

DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT

When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations foe the place of

disposal.

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USE BUTTERIES

In this unit, lithium batteries are used for the following parts:

Indication control board（CMC-1218）: BT1(Maxell:CR2032）

● Do not store used lithium batteries but dispose of them as non-combustible waste.

● When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to insulate the batteries by

taping the + and - terminals.

For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local laws and regulation.

For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the product our business office,

or local government.

10.3 DISPOSAL OF

USED MAGNETRON

Magnetron is used in the Scanner (NKE-1079/1089) and the Transmitter-receiver

unit (NGT-3037/3037A/3028) of the unit.

● When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron

to our dealer or business office.

For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.

SECTION 11

SPECIFICATIONS

11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-1

11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ...................................... 11-2

11.3 JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-3

11.4 JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ............................ 11-4

11.5 SCANNER（NKE-1079）.............................................. 11-5

11.6 SCANNER（NKE-1075）.............................................. 11-5

11.7 SCANNER（NKE-1089-7/9） ....................................... 11-6

11.8 SCANNER（NKE-1087-6/9） ....................................... 11-7

11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3037） ......... 11-8

11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3028） ......... 11-9

11.11 DISPLAY UNIT（NCD-4263） ..................................... 11-10

11.12 ARPA ........................................................................ 11-12

11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-63） .................... 11-13

11.14 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-64） .................... 11-13

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-1

１１

SPECIFICATIONS

11.1 JMA-9933-SA TYPE RADAR ･････････････････

■ General Specification

(1) Type of Emission ：P0N

(2) Display ：Color Raster Scan

(3) Screen ：23.1-inch Color LCD

(Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)

(4) Range scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48

and 96 (or 120) NM

(5) Range Resolution ：Less than 30m

(6) Minimum Detective Range ：Less than 40m

(7) Bearing Accuracy ：Less than 1°

(8) Bearing Indication ：North-up / Head-up / Course-up

(9) Ambient Condition ：Temperature

Scanner −25℃ to ＋55℃

(Storage Temperature−25℃ to ＋70℃)

Other Units expect Scanner−25℃ to ＋55℃

Relative Humidity 93% at +40℃

(10) Vibration ：2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%

13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s

2

constant

(11) Power Supply Input ：Scanner AC220V,60Hz,3φ

AC110/220V, 60Hz,1φ

(12) Power Consumption ：Approx.800VA

(13) Power Supply Input

Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage ±10%

(at the maximum cable length)

(14) Pre-heating Time ：Within 4 min

(15) From Standby

up to Operation ：Within 15 sec

■ Scanner (NKE-1079) See 11.5

■ Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3037） See 11.9

■

Display (NCD-4263） See 11.11

■

Performance Monitor（NJU-63） See 11.13

■

Option

(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater ：NKE-1079-D (only heater collar)

(2) Radar Interswitch ：NQE-3141-2/4

(3) Display Unit (Desktop Type)

：NCD-4263T

■

Distance between Units Maximum Distance

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-2

１１

(1) Scanner to Transmitter-receiver ：30m

(2) Display to Transmitter-receiver ：35m

■

Compass Safety Distance Standard

(1) Scanner ：1.4m

(2) Transmitter-receiver ：2.8m

(3) Display ：3.2m

11.2 JMA-9932-SA TYPE RADAR ･････････････････

■ General Specification

(1) Type of Emission ：P0N

(2) Display ：Color Raster Scan

(3) Screen ：23.1-inch Color LCD

(Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)

(4) Range scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48

and 96 (or 120) NM

(5) Range Resolution ：Less than 30m

(6) Minimum Detective Range ：Less than 40m

(7) Bearing Accuracy ：Less than 1°

(8) Bearing Indication ：North-up / Head-up / Course-up

(9) Ambient Condition ：Temperature

Scanner −25℃ to ＋55℃

(Storage Temperature −25℃ to ＋70℃)

Other Units expect Scanner−15℃ to ＋55℃

Relative Humidity 93% at +40℃

(10) Vibration ：2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%

13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s

2

constant

(11) Power Supply Input ：Scanner AC220/230V,60Hz,3φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz,1φ

(12) Power Consumption ：Approx.800VA

(13) Power Supply Input

Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage ±10%

(at the maximum cable length)

(14) Pre-heating Time ：Within 4 min

(15) From Standby

up to Operation ：Within 15 sec

■ Scanner (NKE-1075A） See 11.6

■

Display (NCD-4263） See 11.11

■

Performance Monitor（NJU-63） See 11.13

■

Option

(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater ：NKE-1075A-D (only heater collar)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-3

１１

(2) Radar Interswitch ：NQE-3141-2/4

(3) Display Unit (Desktop Type) ：NCD-4263T

■

Distance between Units Maximum Distance

(1) Scanner - Display ：65m

■

Compass Safety Distance Standard

(1) Scanner ：1.4m

(2) Display ：3.2m

11.3 JMA-9923-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ････････････

■ General Specification

(1) Type of Emission ：P0N

(2) Display ：Color Raster Scan

(3) Screen ：23.1-inch Color LCD

(Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)

(4) Range Scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48

and 96 (or 120) NM

(5) Range Resolution ：Less than 30m

(6) Minimum

Detective Range ：Less than 40m

(7) Bearing Accuracy ：Less than 1°

(8) Bearing Indication ：North-up / Head-up / Course-up

(9) Ambient Condition ：Temperature

Scanner −25℃ to ＋55℃

(Storage Temperature −25℃ to ＋70℃)

Other Units expect Scanner−15℃ to ＋55℃

Relative Humidity 93% at +40℃

(10) Vibration ：2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%

13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s

2

constant

(11) Power Supply Input ：Scanner AC220/230V,60Hz,3φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz,1φ

(12) Power Consumption ：Approx.600VA

(13) Power Supply Input

Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage±10%

(at the maximum cable length)

(14) Pre-heating Time ：Within 4 min

(15) From Standby

up to Operation ：Within 15 sec

■ Scanner (NKE-1089-7/9) See 11.6

■

Transmitter-receiver (NTG-3028) See 11.10

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-4

１１

■ Display (NCD-4263) See 11.11

■

Performance Monitor (NJU-64) See 11.13

■

Option

(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater ：NKE-1089-7D/9D (only heater coller)

(2) Radar Interswitch ：NQE-3141-2 / 4

(3) Display Unit (Desktop Type)

：NCD-4263T

■

Distance between Units Maximum Distance

(1) Scanner to Transmitter-receiver ：30m

(2) Display to Transmitter-receiver ：35m

■

Compass Safety Distance Standard

(1) Scanner ：1.4m

(2) Transmitter-receiver ：2.8m

(3) Display ：3.2m

11.4 JMA-9922-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR ････････････

■ General Specification

(1) Type of Emission ：P0N

(2) Display ：Color Raster Scan

(3) Screen ：23.1-inch Color LCD

(Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)

(4) Range Scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48

and 96 (or 120) NM

(5) Range Resolution ：Less than 30m

(6) Minimum

Detective Range ：Less than 40m

(7) Bearing Accuracy ：Less than 1°

(8) Bearing Indication ：North-up / Head-up / Course-up

(9) Ambient Condition ：Temperature

Scanner −25℃ to ＋55℃

(Storage Temperature −25℃ to ＋70℃)

Other Units expect Scanner−15℃ to ＋55℃

Relative Humidity 93% at +40℃

(10) Vibration : 2 to 13.2Hz amplitude ±1mm±10%

13.2 to 100Hz,max.accelaration 7m/s

2

constant

(11) Power Supply Input ：Scanner AC220/230V,60Hz,3φ

AC100/110/220/230V, 60Hz, 1φ

(12) Power Consumption ：Approx.600VA

(13) Power Supply Input

Voltage Fluctuation ：Input Voltage±10%

(at the maximum cable length)

(14) Pre-heating Time ：Within 4 min

(15) From Standby

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-5

１１

up to Operation ：Within 15 sec

■ Scanner (NKE-1087-6/9) See 11.6

■

Display (NCD-4263) See 11.11

■

Performance Monitor (NJU-64) See 11.13

■

Option

(1) Scanner with Deicing Heater : NKE-1087-6D/9D (only heater coller)

(2) Radar Interswitch : NQE-3141-2 / 4

(3)

Display Unit (Desktop Type) : NCD-4263T

■

Distance between Units Maximum Distance

(1) Scanner Display : 65m

■

Compass Safety Distance Standard

(1) Scanner ：2.4m

(2) Display : 3.2m

11.5 SCANNER（NKE-1079）･･････････････････････

(1) Dimensions ：Height 837×Swing Circle 4000 (mm)

(2) Mass ：Approx. 142kg

(3) Polarization ：Horizontal Polarization

(4) Directional Characteristic ：Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)

Vertical Beam Width 30°(-3dB width)

Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±10°)

Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)

(5) Revolution ：Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)

(6) Drive Motor ：220V AC, 60Hz, 3φ

AC110/220V , 60Hz, 1φ

(7) Wind Velocity ：Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100 knots)

11.6 SCANNER（NKE-1075A）･･････････････････････

(1) Dimensions ：Height 581 × Swing Circle 4000 (mm)

(2) Mass ：Approx. 163kg

(3) Polarization ：Horizontal Polarization

(4) Directional Characteristic ：Horizontal Beam Width 1.9°(-3dB width)

Vertical Beam Width 30°(-3dB width)

Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (Within ±10°)

Below -30dB (Outside ±10°)

(5) Revolution ：Approx. 26 rpm (60Hz)

(6) Drive Motor ：AC220/230V, 60Hz,3φ

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-6

１１

AC100/110/220/230V , 60Hz, 1φ

(7) Wind Velocity ：Relative Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)

(8) Transmitting Frequency ：3050±10MHz

(9) Peak Power ：30kW

(10) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1302］

(11) Pulse Width /

Repeatition Frequency ：0.07µs/1900Hz （0.125,0.25,0.5NM）

0.07µs/1900Hz （0.75NM） By change over

0.15µs/1900Hz switch

0.1 µs/1900Hz

0.2 µs/1900Hz (1.5NM) By change over

0.3 µs/1900Hz switch

0.2 µs/1900Hz

0.3 µs/1900Hz (3NM) By change over

0.6 µs/1100Hz switch

0.6 µs/1100Hz (6,12NM) By change over

1.2 µs/570Hz switch

1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(12) Modulation ：Solid States Modulator Circuit

(13) Duplexer ：Circulator + TRHPL

(14) Front End Module ：Built-in

(15) Intermediate Frequency

Amplifier ：Intermediate Frequency：60MHz

Band Width：20/6/3MHz

Gain：More than 90dB

Amplifying Characteristics：Logarithmic Amplifier

(16) Overall Noise Figure ：7.5dB (Average)

(17) Tuning ：Manual/Auto

11.7 SCANNER（NKE-1089-7/9）･････････････････

(1) Dimensions ：7ft Height 536×Swing Circle 2270 (mm)

9ft Height 536×Swing Circle 2825 (mm)

(2) Mass ：7ft Approx. 43kg

9ft Approx. 46kg

(3) Polarization ：Horizontal Polarization

(4) Directional Characteristic ：Horizontal Beam Width 7ft 1°(-3dB width）

9ft 0.8°(-3dB width）

Vertical Beam Width 20°(-3dB width）

Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (within ±10°)

Below -30dB (Outside±10°)

(5) Revolution ：Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)

(6) Drive Motor ：7ft AC 220/230V, 60Hz, 3φ

AC100/110V / 220/230V ,60Hz, 1φ

9ft AC220/230V ,60Hz, 3φ

AC100/110V / 220/230V ,60Hz, 1φ

SP

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-7

１１

(7) Wind Velocity ：Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)

11.8 SCANNER（NKE-1087-6/9）･････････････････

(1) Dimensions ：6ft Height 536 × Swing Circle 1910(mm)

9ft Height 536 × Swing Circle 2825(mm)

(2) Mass ：6ft Approx. 48kg

9ft Approx. 52kg

(3) Polarization ：Horizontal Polarization

(4) Directional Characteristic ： Horizontal Beam Width 6ft 1.2°(-3dB

width)

9ft 0.8°(-3dB width)

Vertical Beam Width 20°(-3dB width）

Sidelobe Level Below -26dB (within ±10°)

Below -30dB (Outside±10°)

(5) Revolution ：Approx. 26rpm (60Hz)

(6) Drive Motor ：6ft AC220/230V ,60Hz, 3φ

AC100/110V / 220/230V,60Hz, 1φ

9ft AC220/230V,60Hz, 3φ

AC100/110V / 220/230V, 60Hz, 1φ

(7) Wind Velocity ：Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)

(8) Transmitting Frequency ：9410±30MHz

(9) Peak Power ：25kW

(10) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1568B(J)］

(11) Pulse Width /

Repeatition Frequency ：0.07µs/1900Hz （0.125,0.25,0.5NM）

0.07µs/1900Hz （0.75NM） By change over

0.15µs/1900Hz switch

0.1 µs/1900Hz

0.2 µs/1900Hz (1.5NM) By change over

0.3 µs/1900Hz switch

0.2 µs/1900Hz

0.3 µs/1900Hz (3NM) By change over

0.6 µs/1100Hz switch

0.6 µs/1100Hz (6,12NM) By change over

1.2 µs/570Hz switch

1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(12) Modulation ：Solid States Modulator Circuit

(13) Duplexer ：Circulator + Diode Limiter

(14) Front End Module ：Built-in

(15) Intermediate Frequency

Amplifier ：Intermediate Frequency：60MHz

Band Width：20/6/3MHz

Gain：More than 90dB

Amplifying Characteristics：Logarithmic Amplifier

SP

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-8

１１

(16) Overall Noise Figure ：7.5dB (Average)

(17) Tuning ：Manual/Auto

11.9 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3037）

(1) Dimensions ：Height 615 × Width 615 × Depth 365 (mm)

(2) Structure ：Wall Mount Drip Proof

(3) Mass ：Approx. 35kg

(4) Transmitting Frequency ：3050±10MHz

(5) Peak Power ：30kW

(6) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1302］

(7) Pulse Width /

Repeatition Frequency ：0.07µs/1900Hz （0.125,0.25,0.5NM）

0.07µs/1900Hz （0.75NM） By change over

0.15µs/1900Hz switch

0.1 µs/1900Hz

0.2 µs/1900Hz (1.5NM) By change over

0.3 µs/1900Hz switch

0.2 µs/1900Hz

0.3 µs/1900Hz (3NM) By change over

0.6 µs/1100Hz switch

0.6 µs/1100Hz (6,12NM) By change over

1.2 µs/570Hz switch

1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(8) Modulation ：Solid States Modulator Circuit

(9) Duplexer ：Circulator + TRHPL

(10) Front End Module ：Built-in

(11) Intermediate Frequency

Amplifier ：Intermediate Frequency：60MHz

Band Width：20/6/3MHz

Gain：More than 90dB

Amplifying Characteristics：Logarithmic Amplifier

(12) Overall Noise Figure ：7.5dB (Average)

(13) Tuning ：Manual/Auto

SP

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-9

１１

11.10 TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT（NTG-3028）

(1) Dimensions ：Height 461 × Width 460 × Depth 227 (mm)

(2) Structure ：Wall Mount Drip Proof

(3) Mass ：Approx. 19kg

(4) Transmitting Frequency ：9410±30MHz

(5) Peak Power ：25kW

(6) Transmitting Tube ：Magnetron［M1568B(J)］

(7) Pulse Width /

Repeatition Frequency ：0.07µs/1900Hz （0.125,0.25,0.5NM）

0.07µs/1900Hz （0.75NM） By change over

0.15µs/1900Hz switch

0.1 µs/1900Hz

0.2 µs/1900Hz (1.5NM) By change over

0.3 µs/1900Hz switch

0.2 µs/1900Hz

0.3 µs/1900Hz (3NM) By change over

0.6 µs/1100Hz switch

0.6 µs/1100Hz (6,12NM) By change over

1.2 µs/570Hz switch

1.2 µs/570Hz (24,48,96,120NM)

(8) Modulation ：Solid States Modulation circuit

(9) Duplexer ：Circulator + TRHPL

(10) Front End Module ：Built-in

(11) Intermediate Frequency

Amplifier ：Intermediate Frequency：60MHz

Band Width：20/6/3MHz

Gain：More than 90dB

Amplifying Characteristics：Logarithmic Amplifier

(12) Overall Noise Figure ：7.5dB (Average)

(13) Tuning ：Manual/Auto

SP

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-10

１１

11.11 DISPLAY UNIT（NCD-4263）･････････････････

(1) Dimension ：Height 1100 × Width 703 × Depth 1052 (mm)

(2) Structure ：Self-Standing Drip Proof

(3) Mass ：Approx. 150kg

(4) Display ：23.1-inch Color LCD

(Effective Diameter, more than 340mm)

(5) Range Scale ：0.125,0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24,48,

and 96 (or 120) NM

(6) Range Marker ：0.025,0.05,0.1,0.25,0.5,1,2,4,8,and 16(or 20) NM

(7) Range Accuracy ：Less than 1% of the maximum distance of the

range scale in use or 30m whichever is larger

(8) Variable Rage Markers ：2(VRM1 / VRM2)

(9) VRM Scale ：0.00 - 96.0(or 120.0) NM, Numerical indication in

4 digits

(10) Bearing Marker ：360°in 1°steps

(11) Off Center ：Within 60% of the radius of any range except

96 NM and 120NM

(12) Trackball Cursor ：Built-in (Target range, Relative / True bearing

presentation)

(13) Electronic Bearing Lines ：2 (EBL1 / EBL2) (Center / Independent)

(14) EBL Bearing Indication ：0.0°- 359.9°, Numerical indication in 4 digits

(15) Tuning Indication ：Bar-graph

(16) Marking Function ：Electronic mark(Max. 20 points

(17) Heading Line Indication ：Electronic

(18) True Motion Unit ：Built-in (0.25,0.5,0.75,1.5,3,6,12,24 and 48 NM）

(19) STC(SEA) ：Manual / Auto

(20) FTC(RAIN) ：Manual / Auto

(21) Display Mode ：North-up / head-up / Course-up

(22) Trails Indication ：0.5 min / 1 min / 3 min / 6 min / OFF

(23) Video Process ：Built-in

(24) Interference Rejection ：Built-in (ON/OFF)

(25) Guard Zone ：Ring

(26) Navigation Lines ：Built-in (256 points × 10 types)

(only with navigation equipment is connected)

(27) Self-diagnostic-Function ：Built-in

(28) Own Ship's Track Indicate ：Built-in

(only with navigation equipment is connected)

(29) Parallel Line Cursor ：Built-in

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-11

１１

(30) Interface ：Sub display

Loran-C

GPS

Radar buoy

LOG

GYRO

Radar Interswitch (option)

External Alarm output

(Reference) NMEA0183 Interface

 Receivable sentence ・BWC ・GGA

・GLL ・RMA

・RMB ・RMC

・VBW ・ZDA

・VTG

 Priority

（1）Latitude/Longitude ：GGA > RMC > RMA > GLL

（2）Waypoint ：RMB > BWC

Note：The speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall conform to IMO

Resolution A.824(19).

IEC61162-1(NMEA0183)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-12

１１

11.12 ARPA ･････････････････････････････････････

(1) Acquisition

・Acquisition Mode ：Auto/Manual Acquisition(Targets are acquired

within guard zone in the automatic acquisition

mode)

・Manual Cancellation of

Unwanted Target ：Each One Target or All Target at once

(2) Tracking

・Number of Targets ：50 Targets (Auto Tracking)

・Acquisition and

Tracking Range ：32 NM

(3) Presentation

・Display Modes ：TM (True Motion) / RM (Relative Motion)

・Bearing Modes ：North-up / Head-up / Course-up

・Vector Modes ：True/Relative Display

Vector Length：Adjustable from 1 to 60 min

・Past Position Display ：True / Relative Display

Number of Dots：6 points

Display Time 30sec, 1 min, 2 min, 4 min

・Time to Display Vector ：Within 1 min

・Time to Stabilize Vector ：Within 3 min

(4) Alarm

・Guard Zone ：2

・Setting Ranges ：Guard Zone 1 (0.5 - 32 NM),

Guard Zone 2 (0.5 - 32 NM)

・Alarm Indication ： mark on LCD with Visible / Audible alarm

(5) Safe Limits (CPA/TCPA)

・Setting Condition ：CPA LIMIT (0.1 - 9.9 NM)

TCPA LIMIT (1 - 99 min)

・Alarm Condition ：

Safe

Target

・CPA>CPA LIMIT

・ 0>TCPA

・ TCPA>TCPA LIMIT

Danger

Target

・ CPACPA LIMIT，

0TCPATCPA LIMIT

・Alarm Display ：

Status LCD Symbol Alarm Buzzer

Safe Ship

〇

OFF OFF

Danger Ship 

CPA／TCPA

ON

・Lost Target ： mark on LCD

Visible / Audible Alarms

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11-13

１１

(6) Data Indication

・Target Data ：Simultaneous and Continuous Display for

2 targets

True Bearing, Range, True Course,

True Speed, CPA, TCPA, BCR and BCT

・Own Ship's Data ：Course and Speed

(7) Trial Maneuver Manual Setting

・Trial Course ：0°- 360°

・Trial Speed ：0 - 100 knots

(8) Accuracy of Display ：Complied with IMO Technical Requirements

(9) System Failure Alarm ：Visible / Audible Alarms

(10) Speed Input ：Manual/Auto(log)

11.13 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-63）････････

Dimensions ：Height 56 × Width 150 × Depth 249 (mm)

Mass ：Approx. 1.5kg

Operation Frequency ：3050±30MHz

11.14 PERFORMANCE MONITOR（NJU-64）････････

Dimensions ：Height 56 × Width 150 × Depth 215 (mm)

Mass ：Approx. 1.5kg

Operation Frequency ：9410±30MHz

APPENDIX

Radar System Composition..................................................

Table A-1 S band System Composition

Equipment JMA-9933-SA JMA-9932-SA

Type of Scanner

NKE-1079(*1) NKE-1075A(*1)

Type of Performance Monitor

NJU-63 NJU-63

Type of Transmitter-receiver

Unit

NTG-3037 ------

Type of Modulator Unit

NMA-446 NMA-487

Type of Receiver Unit

NRG-88 NRG-222

Type of Display Unit

NCD-4263(*2)

*1 NKE-1079-1 (110V AC 60 Hz 1φ)

NKE-1079-2F (220V AC 60 Hz 3φ)

NKE-1079-D (110V AC 60 Hz 1φ)

NKE-1079-2DF (220V AC 60 Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

NKE-1075A-1 (100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)

NKE-1075A-2F (220/230V AC 60 Hz 3φ)

NKE-1075A-D (110/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)

NKE-1075A-2DF (220/230V AC 60 Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

*2 NCD-4263 ：Self-standing type

NCD-4263T：Desktop type (NWZ-158T: Monitor Unit, NDC-1279T: Control Unit,

NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit) (Option)

Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport

Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS-9900.

A

-2

Table A-2 X band System Composition

Equipment

JMA-9923-7

XA

JMA-9923-9

XA

JMA-9922-6

XA

JMA-9922-9XA

Type of Scanner

NKE-1089-

7(*1)

NKE-1089-

9(*2)

NKE-1087-

6(*3)

NKE-1087-9(*4)

Type of Performance

Monitor

NJU-64

Type of Modulator Unit

NMA-449

Type of Receiver Unit NRG-98/154

Type of Display Unit

NCD-4263(*5)

*1 NKE-1089-71/72 (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1089-72F (7ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)

NKE-1089-71D/72D (7ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

(Option with deicing heater collar)

NKE-1089-72DF (7ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

*2 NKE-1089-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1089-92F (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)

NKE-1089-91D/92D (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)

(

Option with deicing heater collar)

NKE-1089-91DF (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

*3 NKE-1087-61/62 (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1087-62F (6ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)

NKE-1087-61D/62D (6ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60 Hz 1φ)

(Option with deicing heater collar)

NKE-1087-62DF (6ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ) (Option with deicing heater collar)

*4 NKE-1087-91/92 (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

NKE-1087-92F (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)

NKE-1087-91D/92D (9ft 100/110/220/230V AC 60Hz 1φ)

(Option with deicing heater collar)

NKE-1087-92DF (9ft 220/230V AC 60Hz 3φ)

(Option with deicing heater collar)

*5 NCD-4263 ：Self-standing type

NCD-4263T：Desktop type (NWZ-158T: Monitor Unit, NDC-1279T: Control Unit,

NCE-7721: Keyboard Unit)(Option)

Note: The ARPA unit have the approbation by the Ministry of Transport

Automatic equipment for Prevention of collision JAS-9800.

Radar System Circuit Block.................................................

Table A-3 3-unit Type Scanner (S band)

Type of Scanner NKE-1079-1

(100V AC,1φ)

NKE-1079-2F

(220V AC,3φ)

NKE-1079-1D

(100V AC,1φ)

NKE-1079-2DF

(220V AC,3φ)

Inner Antenna

Driving Part

CQC-764

CBP-129

CQC-764

CBP-128

CQC-764

CBP-129

CQC-764

CBP-128

Heater Cont.

--- --- CCK-751 CCK-751

("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751）

Table A-4 2-unit Type Scanner (S band)

Type of Scanner NKE-1075-1

(100V AC,1

φ)

NKE-1075-2

(230V AC,1φ)

NKE-1075-2F

(230V AC,3φ)

Inner Antenna

Driving Part

CQC-1004

CBP-129

CQC-1004

CBP-146

CQC-1004

CBP-128

IF AMP circuit

Inner Receiver Unit

CAE-344-4

CMA-554

CAE-344-4

CMA-554

CAE-344-4

CMA-554

Receiver Unit

RNG-222

RF AMP circuit

LO OSC circuit

Bias circuit

Limiter circuit

CAF-424

CCH-205

CBD-1274

CNL-23

CAF-424

CCH-205

CBD-1274

CNL-23

CAF-424

CCH-205

CBD-1274

CNL-23

Modulator Unit

NMA-534

Modulator circuit

Inner Modulator circuit

Filter circuit

CPA-209

CNM-239

CFR-161

CPA-209

CNM-239

CFR-161

CPA-209

CNM-239

CFR-161

T/R control circuit

Power circuit

Relay circuit

CMC-1205

CBD-1682

CSC-632

CMC-1205

CBD-1682

CSC-632

CMC-1205

CBD-1682

CSC-632

("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751）

A

-4

Table A-5 3-unit Type Scanner (X band)

("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751)

Table A-6 2-unit Type Scanner (X band)

Type of Scanner

NKE-1087-6

(100/110VAC,1φ)

NKE-1087-6

(220/230VAC,1φ)

NKE-1087-6

(220/230VAC,3φ)

Inner Antenna

Driving Part

CQC-683

CBP-122

CQC-683

CBP-123

CQC-683

CBP-132

Receiver Unit

RNG-222

IF AMP circuit

Inner Receiver Unit

CAE-344

CMA-588

CAE-344

CMA-588

CAE-344

CMA-588

Modulator Unit

NMA-534

Modulator circuit

Inner Modulator Unit

Filter circuit

CPA-209-1

CNM-234

CFR-161

CPA-209-1

CNM-234

CFR-161

CPA-209-1

CNM-234

CFR-161

T/R control circuit

Power circuit

Relay circuit

CMC-1025

CBD-1645

CSC-632

CMC-1025

CBD-1645

CSC-632

CMC-1025

CBD-1645

CSC-632

("D" is attached with a heater control part option to a form name Heater Cont：CCK-751)

Type of

Scanner

NKE-1089-71/91

(100/110VAC,1φ)

NKE-1089-72/92

(220/230VAC,1φ)

NKE-1089-72F/92F

(220/230VAC,3φ)

Inner Antenna

Driving Part

CQC-1108

CBP-170

CQC-1108

CBP-171

CQC-1108

CBP-172

Table A-7 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (S band)

Table A-8 3-unit Type Transmitter-receiver Unit Composition (X band)

Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit

NTG-3037

Modulator Unit

NMA-1253

・Modulator circuit

・Filter circuit

・Inner Modulator Unit

CPA-209

CFR-161

CNM-236

Receiver Unit

NRG-88

・IF AMP circuit

・RF AMP circuit

・LO OSC circuit

・Bias circuit

・Limiter circuit

・Inner receiver unit

CAE-344-1

CAF-424

CGH-205

CBD-1274

CNL-23

CMA-554

・Power circuit

・T/R control circuit

・Relay circuit

CBD-1682

CMC-1205

CSC-632

・Inner transmitter-receiver unit

CQC-1093

Type of Transmitter-receiver Unit

NTG-3028

Modulator Unit

NMA-1252

・Modulator

・Filter circuit

・Inner modulator unit

CPA-209-1

CFR-161

CNM-235

Receiver Unit

NRG-98

・IF AMP

・Inner receiver unit

CAE-344

CMA-588

・Power circuit

・T/R control circuit

・Relay circuit

CBD-1682

CMC-1205

CSC-632

・Inner transmitter-receiver unit

CQC-1092

A

-6

Table A-9 NCD-4263 Type Display Unit Circuit Compositions

Display Unit NCD-4263 JRC Code

Remarks

1

Inner display unit

CWB-1256

2 NSK/LOG I/F unit

NSK/LOG I/F circuit

CMJ-462A

3

Rack unit

Terminal board circuit

Display control circuit

Radar process circuit

Mother board

CQD-1949

CMC-1218

CDC-1209

CQC-1094

4

Inner keyboard unit

Panel circuit

1

Panel circuit 2

Panel circuit 3

Connection cable

CWB-1211-PSO/RST

CCK-900

CCK-901

CCK-902

CFQ-6908-RSO/RST

5

Monitor unit

Case part

Operation unit

CWB-1255

CCK-906

6

Inner power supply unit

Power supply circuit

CBD-1661

7

Interswitch circuit

CCL-291

(NQE-3141)

(Option)

Table A-10 NDC-1279 Type Control Unit Circuit Compositions

Table A-11 NCE-7721 Type Keyboard Unit Circuit Compositions

Table A-12 NWZ-158 Type Monitor Unit Circuit Compositions

Control Unit NDC-1279

JRC Code

Remarks

1

Inner display unit

CWB-1256

2

NSK/LOG I/F unit

NSK/LOG I/F circuit

CMJ-462A

3

Rack unit

Terminal board circuit

Display control circuit

Radar process circuit

Mother board

CQD-1949

CMC-1218

CDC-1209

CQC-1094

4

Inner power supply circuit

Power supply circuit

CBD-1661

5

Interswitch circuit

CCL-291

(NQE-3141)

(Option)

Keyboard Unit NCE-7721 JRC Code

Remarks

1

Inner keyboard unit

Panel circuit 1

Panel circuit 2

Panel circuit 3

Connection cable

CWB-1211-RSO/RST

CCK-900

CCK-901

CCK-902

CFQ-6908-RSO/RST

(Option)

Monitor Unit NWZ-158 JRC Code

Remarks

1

Monitor unit

Case part

Operation unit

CWB-1255T

CCK-906

A

-8

INTERSWITCH

(NQE-3141)

OPERATION MANUAL

1. GENERAL........................................................................1

1.1 O

UTLINE ......................................................................1

1.2 I

NTERSWITCH CONSTRUCTION......................................1

2. OPERATIONS..................................................................2

2.1 O

PERATION FLOW ........................................................ 2

2.2 S

UB1 MENU .................................................................3

2.3 ISW

(INTERSWITCH) MENU ...........................................4

2.3 C

HANGING INTERSWITCH PATTERNS .............................6

3. REFERENCES...............................................................10

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-1

APPENDIX

1. GENERAL

1.1 Outline･････････････････････････････････････････････

The NQE-3141 interswitch allows interconnections to be changed freely between

bridge-installed multiple radar display units and multiple scanner units different in characteristics.

The NQE-3141 can change the interconnections between multiple radar display units and

multiple transmitter-receiver/scanner units (in the remainder of this manual, referred to as MTRs)

in the JMA-9900 Series radar system.

It is possible to change the interconnections between up to eight combinations of units: (two units

in the case of a built-in type) x (four units in the case of a separate type).

1.2 Interswitch Construction･････････････････････････････

The Interswitch Kit is incorporated in the display unit. (Option)

The number of combined display units and MTRs according to the interswitch kit is different

between the 2-units system and the 3-units system.

The distinction between the 2-units system and the 3-units system is determined by the internal

settings.

The pattern switchover operations can be exercised simply and quickly according to the menus

displayed on the display unit. The interseitch patterns as shown below are displayed at the upper

left of the radar display. (The position filled on the mark indicates the position of the display unit

currently operated.)

Radar system of

2-radar indicators

......

Interswitch patterns

(Combinations of six patterns)

Unit arrangement (towards the ship's heading)

MTR (L)

MTR (R)

Display unit (L) Display unt (R)

Display unit

MTR

L R

No.1 No.2

No.3 No.4

No.5 No.6

Radar system of

3-radar indicators

......

Interswitch patterns

(Combinations of twelve patterns)

Unit arrangement (towards the ship's headhing)

MTR (L)

MTR (R)

Display unit (L)

Display unit (R)

MTR (C)

Display unit (C)

Display unit

MTR L C R

L C R

No.1 No.2

No.3 No.4

No.5 No.6

No.7 No.8

No.9 No.10

No.11

No.12

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-2

APPENDI

X

① Click MENU , then SUB1 MENU

① Click ISW .

① Click the pattern selection menu number.

Click SET .

② Click EXIT .

① Click EXIT .

① Click MENU .

The radar will be placed in

the standby mode. The

changed pattern diagram

in the center of the display

as well as the change

menu at the right of the

display will be displayed.

① Click the

on the upper left of the screen.

(This software button is differing in

selecting pattern. This picture is

2UNIT, No.4.)

2. OPERATIONS

When switching over the interswitch patterns, first set the system to the STBY mode and

proceed the switch operations on the operation panel of the Display Unit as shown in the

operation flow below.

2.1 Operation Flow･･････････････････････････････････････

The following flowchart shows the operation flow from menu opening to menu closing.

〔Closing the interswitch menu〕

〔Open of the Sub1 Menu〕

〔Changing interswitch patterns〕

〔The ISW Menu will appear〕

〔The Sub1 Menu will be closed〕

〔Open of software button〕

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-3

APPENDIX

2.2 Software button /Sub1 Menu･･････････････････････････

Refer to: (A) [Sub1 Menu display･･･Selection of an ISW Menu]

Open of software button

Click the on the upper left of the screen.

Open the ISW Menu.

This software button is differing in selecting pattern. This picture is 2UNIT, No.4.

Open of the Sub1 Menu

① Click Menu .

② Click SUB1 MENU .

The Sub1 Menu will appear.

Sub1 Menu

The Sub1 Menu will be closed

③

Click Menu . Or click EXIT .

SUB1 MENU

1.

2.

０．

EXIT

3.

4.

5.

6.

SUB2 MENU

7.

8.

9.

SETTING1

LEVEL

NAV/MAP INFO

TRACK

ARPA

ISW

EBL MANEUVER

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-4

APPENDI

X

(2-unit system) ←Set with the equipped (2-unit/ 3-unit)→ (3-unit system)

Unit No. of radar system

Pattern No.

The number surrounded by a

frame is the number to be

selected.

ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ

Ｎo.１Ｎo.２

Ｎo.３

Ｎo.４

Ｎo.５Ｎo.６

EXIT

0.

SET

2.

1.

3UNIT

PREVIOUS/NEXT

2.3 ISW (Interswitch) Menu･･･････････････････････････････

Refer to: (B) [ISW MENU 1･･･2-units (No.1 to No.6)]

(C) [ISW MENU 2･･･3-units (No.1 to No.6)]

(D) [ISW MENU 3･･･3-units (No.7 to No.12)]

The Interswitch Menu can be selected only when the radar system is set to on the standby mode.

Although the Interswitch Menu can be opened during transmission, the radar system will stop

transmission and enter the standby state automatically.

The Sub1 Menu will appear

The ISW Menu will appear

③ Click ISW .

ISW Menu (on display right)

ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ

Ｎo.１

Ｎo.２

Ｎo.４

Ｎo.６

Ｎo.３

Ｎo.５

EXIT

0.

SET

2.

1.

2UNIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-5

APPENDIX

The MTR not-connected or

at fault.

(× mark draw)

The MTR currently operated.

(filled in reverse video)

ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)

The pattern diagrams for the 2-units sysem is different from the pattern diagrams for the 3-units

system.

・6 pattern diagrams are displayed gor 2-units system.

・12 pattern diagrams (on two pages with 6 patterns per page) are displayed for 3-units system.

In the pattern diagram.

・The pattern diagram dark filled represents the current pattern.

・The display unit currently in operation is highlighted in the reverse black/white view.

・A display unit or MTR marked with“×”is not connected or has a failure.

・The pattern diagram with the mark“×”cannot be selected as described above.

The ISW Menu will be closed

② Click EXIT .

The Sub1 Menu will be closed

③ Click EXIT .

Ｎo.１

×

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-6

APPENDI

X

(2-unit system) (3-unit system)

ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ

Ｎo.１Ｎo.２

Ｎo.３

Ｎo.４

Ｎo.５Ｎo.６

EXIT

0.

SET

2.

1.

3UNIT

PREVIOUS/NEXT

2.3 Changing Interswitch Patterns････････････････････････

The Sub1 Menu will appear

The ISW Menu will appear

Select an ISW pattern

① Click + or - to select Pattern No.

ISW Menu (on display right)

ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)

Click + or - , and the pattern diagram will be enclosed by a square line,

which signifies“selecting”.

3-unit system is click PEVIOUS/NEXT ,selectid No.7 to No.12

② Click SET .

(SET is indicated to selecting pattern.)

ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ

Ｎo.１

Ｎo.２

Ｎo.４

Ｎo.６

Ｎo.３

Ｎo.５

EXIT

0.

SET

2.

1.

2UNIT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-7

APPENDIX

Message Area (on display lower right)

“ISW END”is blinking and an alarm buzzer sounds.

ISW Menu (Pattern Diagram)(on display center)

The selected pattern deagram is blinking for about 5 seconds, and if it is

established, the pattern is selected.

Note that if the seitchover fails, the selected pattern will not appear. The

blinking is stopped after about 5 second and the previous pattern diagram

will reappear. In this case."ISW TIME OUT"will appear on the message area

on the lower right of the display and an alarm sound is given.

In this state, re-select the pattern diagram and seitch over the units. If the

re-selection fails, contact JRC service depot.

Pre-heat Time Countdown (on display center or the upper part)

When the seitchover operation is completed, the timer at the display center

or the upper part will start the countdown. At this time, the radar operation

state at the upper right of the display indicates "PREHEAT".

If the count "0:00" is indicated, the indication at the upper right on the

radar display is changed from "PREHEAT" to "STANDBY".

The ISW Menu will be closed

The Sub1 Menu will be closed

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-8

APPENDI

X

6

AUTO

HDG

OS STAB GND

SPEED

MAN

COG

SOG

245.0 °

kts

15.0

WATER

279.1

°

kts

9.2

30.0

°

kts

9.0

ACUIRE

°

nm

°

137.1

4.514

252.1

35゜31.675'

E139゜43.773'

OFF

CENTER

CPA

RING

VRM1

°

nm

2.20

1.70

EBL1

T 135.0

T 037.0 °

nm

000 010

020

030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170180190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330

340

350

35°35.0000'

E139°40.0000'

DEPTH

ARPA STAB GND

2003 / 03 / 18 14：36

FUNC3

VECTOR

LIMIT

min

6

min

10

nm

1.5

PAST POSN

GUARD ZONE

U

OWN

MAN

1 min

21

C

O

VRM2

EBL2

100m

N

REL

TRUE

（）CURSOR

ACT

D

ACT

1

RM NUP

TRANSMIT

X-BAND

3min

0.5min

PROC1

PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

GAIN

T

ENH

OFF

DAY1

PANEL

-+

SP

T

HL OFF

SHIFT

MAP

SET

DRIFT

IR

No Alarm

TOKYO

DISPLAY INFO

MENU P I GZ TEST

ACK

NAV

SUB1 MENU

SETTING1

LEVEL

NAV/MAP INFO

TRACK

ARPA

ISW

EBL MANEUVER

SUB2 MENU

EXIT

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

0.

F

HDG

OS STAB GND

SPEED

MAN

COG

SOG

245.0 °

kts

15.0

WATER

279.1

°

kts

9.2

30.0

°

kts

9.0

35°35.0000'

E139°40.0000'

ARPA STAB GND

2003 / 03 / 18 14：36

VECTOR

LIMIT

min

6

min

10nm1.5

PAST POSN

GUARD ZONE

U

OWN

MAN

1 min

2

SUB1 MENU

1

N

T

SET

DRIFT

No Alarm

TOKYO

DISPLAY INFO

MENU P I GZ TEST

ACK

NAV

ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ

Ｎo.１

Ｎo.２

Ｎo.４

Ｎo.６

Ｎo.３

Ｎo.５

SETTING1

LEVEL

NAV/MAP INFO

TRACK

ARPA

ISW

EBL MANEUVER

SUB2 MENU

EXIT

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

0.

SET

2.

1.

2UNIT

(A) [Sub1 Menu display･･･Selection of an ISW Menu]

(B) [ISW MENU 1･･･2-units (No.1 to No.6)]

The current connection pattern: No.1

The current connection pattern to be selected: No.4

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-9

APPENDIX

HDG

OS STAB GND

SPEED

MAN

COG

SOG

245.0 °

kts

15.0

WATER

279.1

°

kts

9.2

30.0

°

kts

9.0

35°35.0000'

E139°40.0000'

ARPA STAB GND

2003 / 03 / 18 14：36

VECTOR

LIMIT

min

6

min

10nm1.5

PAST POSN

GUARD ZONE

U

OWN

MAN

1 min

2

SUB1 MENU

1

N

T

SET

DRIFT

No Alarm

TOKYO

DISPLAY INFO

MENU P I GZ TEST

ACK

NAV

ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ

SETTING1

LEVEL

NAV/MAP INFO

TRACK

ARPA

ISW

EBL MANEUVER

SUB2 MENU

EXIT

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

0.

Ｎo.１Ｎo.２

Ｎo.３

Ｎo.４

Ｎo.５Ｎo.６

EXIT

0.

SET

2.

1.

3UNIT

PREVIOUS/NEXT

(C) [ISW MENU 2･･･3-units (No.1 to No.6)]

The current connection pattern: No.1

The current connection pattern to be selected: No.4

(D) [ISW MENU 3･･･3-units (No.7 to No.12)]

The current connection pattern to be selected: No.10

HDG

OS STAB GND

SPEED

MAN

COG

SOG

245.0 °

kts

15.0

WATER

279.1

°

kts

9.2

30.0

°

kts

9.0

35°35.0000'

E139°40.0000'

ARPA STAB GND

2003 / 03 / 18 14：36

VECTOR

LIMIT

min

6

min

10nm1.5

PAST POSN

GUARD ZONE

U

OWN

MAN

1 min

2

SUB1 MENU

1

N

T

SET

DRIFT

No Alarm

TOKYO

DISPLAY INFO

MENU P I GZ TEST

ACK

NAV

ＩＮＴＥＲＳＷＩＴＣＨ

SETTING1

LEVEL

NAV/MAP INFO

TRACK

ARPA

ISW

EBL MANEUVER

SUB2 MENU

EXIT

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

0.

Ｎo.７Ｎo.８

Ｎo.９

Ｎo.10

Ｎo.11 Ｎo.12

EXIT

0.

SET

2.

1.

3UNIT

PREVIOUS/NEXT

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-10

APPENDI

X

3. REFERENCES

Preheating Time after Pattern Selection

After switching over the interswitch patterns, it is necessary to wait for the time as

mentioned below because the pre-heat time is different from the previous

interconnection between the MTR and the display unit. This measure is taken for

protecting the electronic tube emitting radar pulses.

(a) Not changed to the new interconnection condition:.........................No preheat

time

(b) Changed to the new interconnection condition.

However, the MTR was used before change:...........................................30

seconds

(c) Changed to the new interconnection condition.

However, the MTR was used before change:.............................................3

minutes

Notes on Pattern Selection

Immediately after switching over the patterns, the try to select another pattern may fail.

This means that even If the pattern switchover is completed, it takes some time to

prepare for the next interswitch operation. In this case, "ISW BUSY" will be indicated in

the message area on the display lower right, and the interswitch operation is not

available.

Alarm Sound Control

The interseitch alarm continues to sound for about 5 seconds. In setting the alarm sound

level, open the Sub1 Menu, press [2] switch to select the "5.BUZZER" in LEVEL Menu.

When stopping the alarm sound immediately after it sounds, press [ALARM ACK] switch.

Even when the alarm sound stops, a certain message will remain in the message area.

Notes on Master/Slave Connection

The Master/Slave connection is a configuration in which the Display Unit connected to the

Scanner Unit is the Master Unit, while the Display Unit connected to the Master Unit is a

Slave Unit. Of the interswitch patterns, the following pattern numbers includes the

Master/Slave connection:

a) 2-unit System: No.3, No.4, No.5 and No.6

b) 3-unit System: No.4, No.5, No.6, No.7, No.8, No.9, No.10 and No.11

If the Master Display Unit is not in the transmission state, it is impossible to set the Slave

Display Unit to the transmission state, If the Master Display Unit is changed from the

transmission to the standby mode, the Slave Display Unit will also be set to the standby

mode forcibly. In this status, "MTR ST-BY" will be indicated in the message area and the

alarm will beep.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-11

APPENDIX

The Slave Display Unit will not change the radar video even if the tuning control is adjusted

because the tuning is controlled by the Master Display Unit. The tuning indicator at the

upper left of the display will show "SLAVE".

The change of the range scale on the Slave Display Unit depends upon the range scale on

the Master Display Unit. In general, the Slave Display Unit can not change the range scale

into a higher one than that on the Master Display Unit. However, a higher range scale may

be selected by the Slave Display Unit if the pulse length/repetition frequency is the same as

on the Master Display.

Scanner Safety Switch

If the Scanner Units are changed over in the condition that the safety switch of one Scanner

Unit is set to "OFF" while the other is set to "ON", "SSW OFF" will be indicated on both the

display.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-12

APPENDI

X

◎ Setting the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit (CCL-304)

Set DIP switches SW11, SW12, and SW13 as follows:

SW 11

SW 13 SW 12

Interswitch circuit board

CCL-304

(1) Setting SW11 (Expansion mode setting and master/slave setting)

1 234

ON

OFF

Expansion mode setting

4 Description

ON

Expansion mode

OFF Normal mode

Master/slave setting

3 Description

ON Slave

OFF Master

Not used

1, 2 Description

ON Not used

OFF Not used

In expansion mode, select ON

for the ISW circuit board at the

slave side.

Select OFF.

Select OFF to connect up to four

units.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-13

APPENDIX

(2) Setting SW12 (Radar connection setting)

1 234

ON

OFF

5768

Radar connection setting

ON No. 1 display unit connection

1

OFF No. 1 display unit non-connection

2 ON No. 1 scanner unit connection

OFF No. 1 scanner unit non-connection

ON No. 2 display unit connection 3

OFF No. 2 display unit non-connection

ON No. 2 scanner unit connection 4

OFF No. 2 scanner unit non-connection

ON No. 3 display unit connection 5

OFF No. 3 display unit non-connection

ON No. 3 scanner unit connection 6

OFF No. 3 scanner unit non-connection

ON No. 4 display unit connection 7

OFF No. 4 display unit non-connection

ON No. 4 scanner unit connection 8

OFF No. 4 scanner unit non-connection

(3) SW13 (Not used)

1 234

ON

OFF

1, 2, 3, 4 Not used

Note: Set the DIP switches of the ISW circuit in accordance with the INSTALLATION

MANUAL, and ensure safety when and before setting the DIP switches.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-14

APPENDI

X

JMA-9900 series Radar

INSTALLATION OF AIS

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-15

APPENDIX

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the optional AIS information display kit for JRC marine radar. This

product provides the AIS information display function, which is optionally available on the JMA-9900

Radar series.

●Read this operation manual carefully before use.

●This manual describes operations of the optional AIS display function only.

Please refer to JAM-9900 series operation manual for operation of other radar functions.

Please keep this operation manual for reference.

●There are two types of AIS interfaces for JMA-9900 Series Radar as follows.

JMA-9900 TYPE AIS I/F Type

Self-standing type NQA-4172*, 7ZCRD0967

Desktop type NQA-4172*, NQA-4172-6

* NQA-4172 : Base Kit (Common unit for both types of JMA-9900 radar.)

Note

This optional AIS kit was checked the operation only by the connection with JRC AIS（JHS-180）.

The capacity and limitations of the system and operational limitations

1. Vectors of ARPA target are displayed by dashed lines instead of solid lines to keep

consistency with those of AIS targets.

2. Maximum 50 AIS targets are displayed in this system. Three kinds of AIS target filter are

provide to prioritize on displaying AIS targets effectively. See 1-10 in this manual.

3. Note that following operational restrictions in this system before using.

1) An AIS function cannot turn ON

・When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.

・When SET and DRIFT was set in “LOG” speed mode

2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.

・When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.

3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected..

・When an AIS function was ON.

4) SET／DRIFT (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.

・When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-16

APPENDI

X

Table of Contents

Introduction …………………………………………………………………… A-15

１． AIS Information Display Function

1-1. AIS Software Buttons ………………………………………… A-18

1-2. Initial Setting

■GPS Antenna installation position Setting …………………… A-19

■

Collision Decision Criteria Setting …………………………..……… A-20

1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF ………………………………………… A-21

1-4. AIS Target Activation

■

Manual Target Activation ………………………………………………… A-22

■

Automatic Target Activation …………………………………………..… A-23

1-5. AIS Target Deactivation …………………………………………… A-24

1-6. AIS Symbol Display ON/OFF ………………………………………… A-25

1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF ………………………………………… A-26

1-8. AIS Target Data Display

■

Types of Data Display ……………………………………………..…… A-27

■

Target Data Display …………………………………………… A-27

■

Target Data Display Cancel …………………………………………… A-28

■

Target Data Display with simple/detail mode …………………… A-28

1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols ……………………………… A-29

1-10. AIS Filter Setting

■

Meaning of AIS Filter …………………………………………………… A-31

■

AIS Filter Type Selection …………………………………………………… A-31

■

AIS Filter Setting …………………………………………………… A-33

■

AIS Filter Area Display ………………………………………… A-34

1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition ……………… A-35

1-12. AIS Lost Target ………………………………………… A-36

1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display

■

Maximum AIS Target Number and Display Priority ……… A-37

■AIS Target

Vector Display ……………………………………..……… A-37

1-14.Alarm Display …………………………………………………… A-38

1-15.Operational Restrictions ………………………………………………… A-39

２．Basic Operation with Track Ball ……………………………… A-40

３．Installation of AIS Information Display Kit

3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit …………………… A-41

3-2. AIS I/F Connection …………………………………… A-41

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-17

APPENDIX

3-3.Set up after Installation ………………………………………… A-42

3-4.Turn on and Check ………………………………………… A-42

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-18

APPENDI

X

１． AIS Information Display Function

1-1 AIS Software Buttons

When AIS I/F is connected, the AIS software button as shown below is displayed on a radar

screen. By operating these buttons, ON/OFF of an AIS function, activation or deactivation of a AIS

symbol, and the display ON/OFF of ARPA-AIS symbol can be performed.

6

SP

AUTO

HDG

OS STAB GND

SPEED

MAN

COG

SOG

245.0 °

kts

15.0

WATER

279.1

°

kts

9.2

30.0

°

kts

9.0

ACUIRE

°

nm

°

137.1

4.514

252.1

35゜31.675'

E139゜43.773'

OFF

CENTER

CPA

RING

VRM1

°

nm

2.20

1.70

EBL1

T 135.0

T 037.0 °

nm

000 010

020

030

040

050

060

070

080

090

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

170180190

200

210

220

230

240

250

260

270

280

290

300

310

320

330

340

350

1

2

3

4

5

6

35°35.0000'

E139°40.0000'

DEPTH

ARPA STAB GND

344

3.8

279

9.2

1.0

5988.6

2003 / 03 / 18 14：36

VECTOR

LIMIT

min

6

min

10

nm

1.5

PAST POSN

GUARD ZONE

OWN

MAN

1 min

2

TARGET ID　　　　　　No 1　

BRG

COURSE

SPEED

RANGE

CPA

TCPA

BCR

BCT

°

nm

°

nm

kts

min

nm

min

No Alarm

TOKYO

NAV

264

3.5

281

9.3

0.4

-2581.4

BRG

COURSE

SPEED

RANGE

CPA

TCPA

BCR

BCT

°

nm

°

nm

kts

min

nm

min

TARGET ID　　　　　　No 2　

1

C

O

VRM2

EBL2

N

REL

TRUE

（）CURSOR

ACT

D

ACT

1

RM NUP

TRANSMIT

X-BAND

DISPLAY INFO

FUNC3

100m

DAY1

PANEL

210

220

3min

0.5min

PROC1PROC

TRAILS

TRACK

RAIN

SEA

GAIN

T

ENH OFF

IR

HL OFF

U

T

DRIFT

SET

SHIFT

MAP

-

+

MENU P I GZ TEST

ACK

F

Example of Display with Optional AIS I/F

ACT

D

ACT

F

AIS Software buttons

①AIS FUNCTION ON/OFF BUTTON

②AIS ACTIVATE

③

AIS DEACTIVATE BUTTON

④

AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

⑤

ARPA SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-19

APPENDIX

1-2 Initial Setting

■GPS Antenna installation position Setting

The distance of the GSP antenna from the position of the radar scanner should be set.

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

MAIN menu opens.

2. Left-click CODE INPUT.

CODE INPUT menu opens.

3. Left-click ０ → END .

ADJUST menu opens.

4. Left-click ARPA／AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

5. Left-click AIS .

AIS menu opens.

6. The GPS antenna rough direction from the radar scanner is chosen with the GPS

button “ . “.

7. Left-click the button in the a:

box of "1.GPS ANT．LOCATION".

The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in bow-stern

direction should be entered. (The direction of the bow side is plus and the

direction of the stern side is minus.)

8. Left-click the button in the b:

box of "1.GPS ANT．LOCATION".

The distance of the GPS antenna from the radar scanner in port-starboard

direction should be entered. (The direction of starboard side is plus and the

direction of the port side is minus.

Note１

Unless it performs this setup correctly, the position of an AIS symbol may not

coincide with the radar echo position of the target.

Note 2

When this setup is performed, offset is added to the data received from GPS, and

the compensated latitude and longitude are displayed as own ship position. It

would be the radar scanner installation position.

Operation

procedure

ADJUST

ARPA／AIS

AIS

1.GSP ANT. LOCATION

a: + 100

b: + 100

(-500 to +500[m])

0. EXIT

a

b

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-20

APPENDI

X

■Collision Decision Criteria Setting (CPA/TCPA)

The collision decision criteria CPA/TCPA of ARPA target are used for AIS target as well.

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

MAIN menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU → ARPA／AIS.

ARPA menu opens.

3. Set CPA LIMIT (Closest Point of Approach)

(1) Left-click the "1.CPA LIMIT" edit box.

CPA LIMIT will be selected.

The numeric input dialogue box is

opened.

(2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the + or -

keys, then press END to input.

4. Set TCPA LIMIT (Time to CPA)

(1) Left-click the "2.TCPA LIMIT" edit box.

TCPA LIMIT will be selected.

The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

(2) Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the + or -

keys, then press "END" to input.

For further details, please refer to Chapter 5 of a JMA-9900 series Instruction Manual.

Operation

procedure

SUB1 MENU

ARPA

TRIAL

AIS　SETTING

EXIT

1. CPA LIMIT

2. TCPA LIMIT

1.5

10

3. CPA RING

OFF ON

4.

5. GATE

6.

2. NARROW

0.

1-99min

0.1-99nm

△

▽

△

▽

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-21

APPENDIX

1-3. AIS Function ON/OFF

■ON/OFF of AIS function is set up. There are two methods to switch ON/OFF of AIS function.

(Method-1 : With the AIS software button on screen.)

Put the arrow cursor on the button at the lower left a screen and click the left

button of the track ball. Every time the left section button is pressed, AIS function on/off

changes alternatively as follows.

a. When the symbol is displayed in the bright color -----AIS function is ON.

b. When the symbol is displayed in the dark color -------AIS function is OFF.

(Method-2 : With the menu operation.)

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "1.AIS FUNCTION".

"1.AIS FUNCTION" is changed to on or off.

Note:

When AIS function is OFF, no AIS symbol is displayed and all AIS functions are completely

turned off. Even if there is a dangerous target, AIS function would not be turned on

automatically.

Operation

procedure

F

SUB1 MENU

ARPA

TRIAL

AIS　SETTING

EXIT

1. CPA LIMIT

2. TCPA LIMIT

1.5

10

3. CPA RING

OFF ON

4.

5. GATE

6.

2. NARROW

0.

1-99min

0.1-99nm

△

▽

△

▽

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-22

APPENDI

X

1-4 AIS Target

1

Activation

■Manual Target Activation

An AIS target is activated by either of the mehod-1 or the method–2 as follows, and then the

vector and the heading of the target are displayed.

(Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)

1. Put the arrow cursor on the ACT button at the lower left of the screen

and click the left button of the track ball.

Cursor mode ”AIS ACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.

2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be activated and press the track ball

section left button .

The selected AIS target is activated.

(Method-2 : With the menu operation)

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU.

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click AIS/ARPA.

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click "ON" of "2.AIS ACTIVATE".

Cursor mode ”AIS ACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the

screen.

6. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be activated and press the track ball section left

button .

The selected AIS target is activated.

※

1

Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols” about the activated target.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-23

APPENDIX

■Automatic Target Activation

The AIS target in a guard zone is activated automatically and the vector and the heading of the

target are displayed. The guard zone for AIS target activation is the same zone used in ARPA. For

further details of guard zone setting, please see “Set Guard Zones” at Chapter 3.4 of the

instruction manual of JMA-9900 series radar. Dangerous AIS targets are also activated

automatically.

Note:

・When the manual ‘ACTIVATION’ operation is performed at the position where no AIS sleeping

symbol is displayed, an AIS target is searched at the near area pointed by the cursor “+”. The

following “search mark” is displayed.

Search Mark

A activated target symbol is displayed when an AIS target is found near the “search mark”. Then

the “search mark” is removed. On the other hand, no AIS target found in approx. 4 minutes, the

“search mark” disappears.

・When no vector of the activated target is displayed, please refer to "1-13 Conditions of AIS

Symbol Display."

・No activated symbol may be displayed if the priority of the search target is lower than existing

activated AIS targets displayed on the screen. Refer to “1-13 Conditions of AIS Symbol

Display”.

SEARCH

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-24

APPENDI

X

1-5 AIS Target Deactivation

When an AIS target is deactivated, the vector and the heading are deleted as a

sleeping

2

target.

(Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)

1. Put the arrow cursor on the DACT button and click the track ball section left

button.

Cursor mode ”AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the screen.

2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball

section left button .

The selected AIS target is deactivated.

(Method-2 : With the menu operation)

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click "ON" of "3.AIS DEACTIVATE".

Cursor mode ”AIS DEACT" is displayed at the upper right side on the

screen.

6. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be deactivated and press the track ball section

left button . The selected AIS target is deactivated.

Note

This operation is only available for an activated target.

※

2

Refer to "1.9 Definitions of AIS Target Symbols” about the sleeping target.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-25

APPENDIX

1.6 AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY ON/OFF

AIS symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure method-1 or method-2 as follows.

(Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)

Put the arrow cursor on the button and click the track ball section le

f

t button. Each

time the left button is pushed, AIS symbol display is changed to on or off.

When the button is displayed in the bright colour ----- AIS Symbol display is on.

When the button is displayed in the dark colour ----- AIS Symbol display is off.

(Method-2 : With the menu operation)

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click ARPA /AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY".

AIS symbol display is changed to on or off.

Note

The ARPA symbol display can only turned OFF when the AIS function id ON.

Turning the AIS function OFF will automatically return ARPA symbols display back ON.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-26

APPENDI

X

1-7. ARPA Symbol Display ON/OFF

ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off by the procedure either of the method-1 or method-2

as follows.

(Method-1 : With the software button on the screen)

Put the arrow cursor on the button and click the track ball section left button. Every

time the left button is pushed, ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off.

When the button is displayed in the bright color ----- ARPA Symbol display is on.

When the button is displayed in the dark color ----- ARPA Symbol display is off.

(Method-2 : With the menu operation)

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "4.AIS SYMBOL DISPLAY".

ARPA symbol display is changed to on or off.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-27

APPENDIX

1-8. AIS Target Data Display

■ Types of Data Display

The detailed or simple numerical data of an AIS target are available. The display items in each

detailed and simple mode are shown as follows.

Display Items Detailed Mode Simple Mode

ＮＡＭＥ（Ship’s Name） Max 20 characters Max 20 characters

ＣＡＬＬＳＩＧＮ Max 7 characters Max 7 characters

ＭＭＳＩ Max 9 characters Max 9 characters

ＣＯＧ Unit 0.1 degrees Unit 0.1 degrees

ＳＯＧ Unit 0.1 knots Unit 0.1 knots

ＣＰＡ Unit 0.1 nm Unit 0.1 nm

ＴＣＰＡ Unit 0.1 min Unit 0.1 min

ＢＲＧ Unit 0.1 degrees

ＲＡＮＧＥ Unit 0.01 nm

ＨＤＧ Unit 0.1 degrees

ＲＯＴ Unit 0.1°／min

Ｌ／Ｌ (Lat/Lon) Unit 0.001 seconds

No display

One target data in the detailed mode or two target data in the simple mode are displayed at the

numerical data area on the screen.

■ Target Data Display

1. Press

Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" is displayed on the upper right of the screen.

2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be data displayed

and press the track ball

section left button .

The numerical information of the selected AIS target is displayed at the right side of

the screen, and is displayed on the AIS target symbol.

ＴＧＴ

ＤＡＴＡ

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-28

APPENDI

X

Note:

When the numerical data is displayed without mark on the radar screen, the target

might exist out of the radar display range.

■ Target Data Display Cancel

1. Press

Cursor mode changes and "TGT DATA" is displayed on the upper right of the screen.

2. Put the cross cursor “+” on the target to be turn off the numerical data display and

press the track ball section left button .

The numerical information of the selected AIS target data is removed from the

numerical data area at the right-hand side of the screen and the symbol

disappears.

■ Target Data Display in simple/detail mode

1. Put the cursor on the buttons or at the upper right of AIS target

numerical data area, and press the trackball section left button.

2. Every time the button is pushed, the mode of numerical data changes to simple

or detail as follows..

Example of Detail mode

Example of Simple mode

When button is

pushed, display

mode is changed

Button

Operation

procedure

ＴＧＴ

ＤＡＴＡ

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-29

APPENDIX

1-9. Definitions of AIS Target Symbols

The AIS symbol is as follows.

Symbol AIS Target Definitions & Meaning

Sleeping

Target

A target symbol indicating the presence and orientation of a

vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location. No additional

information is presented until activated thus avoiding information

overload.

The most acute apex of the triangle is aligned with the heading of

the target, or with its COG.

Activated

Target

A symbol representing the automatic or manual activation of a

sleeping target for the display of additional graphically presented

information including:

- a vector (speed and course over ground or water);

- the heading; and

- ROT or direction of turn indication (if available) to display

actually initiated course changes.

The COG/SOG vector is displayed as dashed line.

The heading is displayed as solid line of fixed length.

A flag on the heading indicates a turned its direction in order to

detect a target maneuver.

When no data is coming, the vector , heading and flag are not

displayed.

Selected

Target

A symbol representing the manual or automatic selection of any

AIS target for the display of detailed information in a separate

data display area. In this area, received target data as well as the

calculated CPA and TCPA values will be shown.

Squares indicated by its corners are drawn around the target

symbol. This mark is displayed on the around of a numerical

display target.

Dangerous

Target

A symbol representing an AIS target (activated or not) which data

contravene pre-set CPA and TCPA limits.

CPA/TCPA alarm sound occurs and a symbol is flashed until

acknowledged.

Lost Target A symbol representing the last valid predicted position of an AIS

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-30

APPENDI

X

target before the reception of its data was lost.

It will become a lost target when fixed time reception of the data

of a dangerous target cannot be carried out. When it becomes a

lost target, a symbol will be displayed on the position predicted by

data received at the end, such as a course and speed.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-31

APPENDIX

1-10. AIS Filter Setting

■ Meaning of AIS Filter

When an AIS filter is set up, AIS targets in the filtering area can be displayed preferentially. A

default filter is set up within a circle with a radius of 20nm from own ship and other type of filter is

selectable by the procedure in this section. When 50 or more AIS targets exist within the limits of

the filter, AIS symbols are displayed according to the display priority indicated in 1-13 “Max target

number and Display priority”.

■AIS Filter Type Selection

There are three kinds of AIS filters as follows. One of them can be selected.

1) RANGE・・・ A filter is set up in the shape of a circle which makes a radius

set-up distance.

2) SECTOR・・・A filter is set up in the shape of a sector including the own ship

heading direction.

3) ZONE ・・・A zone area surrounded by two directions and two ranges from

own ship.

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click AIS FILTER.

AIS FILTER menu opens.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-32

APPENDI

X

6. Left-click the selection section (combo box) of "1.FILTER TYPE".

FILTER TYPE is chosen and the following pull down menu is displayed.

7. Select the FILTER TYPE from the pull-down menu, select 1 through 3 with the

trackball, then left-click.

Note:

If a ARPA guard zone is set, the filter area for AIS target will be modified automatically to

cover the guard zone.

SUB1 MENU

AIS/ARPA

AIS SETTING

OFF ON

EXIT

0.

1. FILTER TYPE

MAKE FILTER

4.

3. FILTER DISP

AIS FILTER

1. RANGE

2. SECTOR

3. ZONE

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-33

APPENDIX

■ AIS Filter Setting

Note:

An AIS filter setting procedure changes according to the filter type chosen.

Select a filter type should be set before setting up a filter area.

1. Set up the type of a filter, according to the preceding clause.

After selecting a filter type, then perform the following procedure to set a filter

area..

2. Left-click MAKE FILTER .

It goes into filter setting mode.

【When a filter type is "RANGE"】

3. Adjust a setting marker to filter setting distance with a VRM knob and left-click.

【When a filter type is “SECTOR”

】

3. Adjust a setting marker to a filter start angle with an EBL knob and left-click.

4. Adjust a setting marker to a filter end angle with an EBL knob and left-click.

【When a filter type is “ZONE”】

3. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to

the starting point of a filter zone. Then left click.

4. Rotate EBL and VRM control knobs to adjust the cross point of EBL and VRM to

the end point of a filter zone. Then left click.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-34

APPENDI

X

■ AIS Filter Area Display

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click AIS FILTER.

AIS FILTER menu opens.

6. Left-click "ON" or "OFF" of "3.FILTER DISP".

The filter area display changes to on or off.

When it is set to ON, filter setting area is displayed as a green

dashed line on the radar screen.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-35

APPENDIX

1-11. AIS and ARPA Target Association Condition

■ When the distance between an AIS target and an ARPA target is less than the “identical

distance” of a preset value, these targets might be the same. In this case, only AIS symbol is

displayed and ARPA symbol may be suppressed. The method of setting the “identical distance”

to activate this association is as follows.

1. Left-click MENU on the screen.

Main menu opens.

2. Left-click SUB1 MENU .

SUB1 menu opens.

3. Left-click ARPA/AIS .

ARPA/AIS menu opens.

4. Left-click AIS SETTING.

AIS SETTING menu opens.

5. Left-click the "7.IDENTICAL DISTANCE" edit box.

TCPA LIMIT will be selected.

The numeric input dialogue box is opened.

6. Input the new value by pressing the 0 to 9 number keys or by using the + or

- keys, then press END to input.

Note:

1. ARPA symbol which was suppressed by this association can be re-displayed by switching

OFF the AIS display. See “1-6 AIS Symbol Display”.

2. Both AIS and ARPA symbol are displayed when the “IDENTICAL DISTANCE” is set to zero.

(Association OFF mode.) When turning power on the radar display, the “IDENTICAL

DISTANCE” is set to zero.

Operation

procedure

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-36

APPENDI

X

1-12. AIS Lost Target

When a dangerous AIS target is lost, the lost target alarm will be activated and the dangerous

target symbol will change to a lost symbol. And the present target position is predicted by the

final received data from the target and the lost symbol position will be updated for approx. 1

minute. The lost symbol would be deleted when “ALARM ACK” key is pressed or no data has

been received for approx. 1 minute after activating a lost target alarm.

LOST TARGET interval depends on the Class A or Class B and the category of ship. Please see

the following the lost target interval for Class A and Class B ship.

【SOLAS ships】（Class A）

Category of Ship Lost target Interval

Ship at anchor or moored and moving at less than 3 knots 18 min

Ship at anchor or moored and moving at more than 3 knots 60 sec

Ship 0 to 14 knots 60 sec

Ship 0 - 14 knots and changing course 60 sec

Ship 14 - 23 knots 36 sec

Ship 14 – 23 knots and changing course 36 sec

Ship > 23 knots 12 sec

Ship > 23 knots and changing course 12 sec

【Non SOLAS ships】（Class B）

Category of Ship Lost target Interval

Ship < 2 knots 18 min

Ship 2 – 14 knots 180 sec

Ship 14 – 23 knots 90 sec

Ship > 23 knots 30 sec

NOTE:

When non dangerous target is lost, the target symbol will be fixed at the last reported position and

deleted automatically after waiting for the data input from the target for above lost target interval.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-37

APPENDIX

1-13. Conditions of AIS Symbol Display

■ Maximum Target Number and Display Priority

Up to 50 AIS target symbols can be displayed in JMA-9900 series radar. When more than 50 AIS

targets exist, 50 targets to be displayed are selected by the following priority order.

1. Dangerous target. (Both CPA and TCPA of a target are less than the preset CPA and

TCPA safe limit.)

2. Selected Target for numerical data display.

3. The target specified in target search mode. (See 1-4 Note for search mode)

4. The target in an AIS filter. (The closer target from own ship in the filter has higher priority

than further ones.)

5. Targets outside of a filter and they do not conform with the above 1 to 4 conditions. A

nearer target from own ship has higher priority than further ones.

Note:

When the 50 AIS targets symbol are displayed and 51

st

target enters, "AIS MAX TARGET"

message appears at the lower right part of the screen and alarm sounds with “Pi! Pi! “.

■ AIS Target Vector Display

- The vector of an AIS symbol is displayed in either ground-stabilized or sea-stabilized by a setup

of the own speed equipment.

The vector used now is displayed on "OS STAB" at the upper right of a screen.

When displayed as "OS STAB GND"--- AIS Vector presentation is Ground-stabilized

When displayed as "OS STAB SEA" --- AIS Vector presentation is Sea-stabilized

- When the vector of an AIS symbol is displayed by sea-stabilized, the sea-stabilized vector of

AIS target is calculated from the COG/SOG of AIS target and the own ship COG/SOG &

CSE/STW information.

-

Note:

The vector of AIS target is not displayed in following cases.

Case 1: COG / SOG data is not transmitted from GPS/DGPS.

Case 2: The selected speed equipment is not working normally.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-38

APPENDI

X

1-14. Alarm Display

■ There are the following alarms in AIS system.

Alarm Message Meaning

CPA / TCPA Dangerous Target is occurred

LOST Lost Target is occurred

AIS MAX TARGET

The number of displayed AIS symbols was exceeded the

maximum target number 50. (The 51st data was

received.)

AIS (DATA) AIS is not connected correctly. Or AIS is turned off.

AIS I/ F (DATA)

The AIS interface is not connected to radar correctly.

Otherwise the interface is faulty.

AIS ALARM ***

It is the alarm information received from AIS,

Local Alarm Number of an ALR sentence is displayed by

3 figure number “***”.. See the AIS Alarm list below.

AIS Alarm List on RADAR display

AIS Alarm NO.

Meaning of AIS

Alarm

001 Tx malfunction

002 Antenna VSWR exceeds limit

003 Rx channel 1 malfunction

004 Rx channel 2 malfunction

005 Rx channel 70 malfunction

006 General failure

008 MKD connection lost

025 external EPFS lost

026 no sensor position in use

029 no valid SOG information

030 no valid COG information

032 Heading lost / invalid

035 no valid ROT information

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-39

APPENDIX

Note:

An alarm message is displayed at lower right part of the radar screen.

1-15. Operational restrictions

AIS function is not available when the manual speed input or SET/DRIFT data is used and following

operational restrictions exist

1) An AIS function cannot turn ON

・When "MANUAL" was selected as a speed input source.

・When SET and DRIFT was set in “LOG” speed mode

2) "LOG" speed mode cannot be chosen as a speed source.

・When an AIS function was ON and SET and DRIFT were set.

3) "MANUAL" speed mode cannot be selected.

.

・When an AIS function was ON.

4) DRIFT／SET (Current correction) function cannot turn ON.

・When an AIS function was ON and speed was set as "LOG".

Alarm message display position

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-40

APPENDI

X

２．Basic Operation with Track Ball

The operation method of the trackball of each menu in this manual. is described in “3.4 Basic

Operations” of the JMA-9900 Instruction Manual.

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-41

APPENDIX

３．Installation of AIS Information Display Kit

Note:

Following connection and setup are not required if the AIS interface was built in the factory before

shipping.

3-1. Composition of AIS Information Display Kit

The AIS kit for JMA-9900 consists of .

-AIS I/F TYPE  : AIS I/F PCB, Base attachment

-7ZCRD0967 : Power and Communication cable

3-2. AIS I/F Connection

(1) Attach the AIS I/F in the indicator. Refer to AIS UNIT INSTALLATION MANUAL.

(2) Connect the communication cable as shown in the following figure.

(3) P

o

w

e

r

c

a

b

l

e

c

o

n

e

c

tion

Connect P16 of attached cable to J16 of the terminal board.

Connect P1 of attached cable to J1 of AIS I/F board.

When ISW is equipped, exchange the existing power cable with the 7ZCRD0967 power cable

in this kit.

AIS I/F Board

TB 4601

Covering is skinned and

itconnects with a terminal

board.

To J500

To J1

①

②

③

P500

P1

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

J16

P16

Power and Communication

cable 7ZCRD0967

Red

Green

Blak

JMA-9900 Terminal Board

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

A-42

APPENDI

X

3-3. Set up after Installation

Set up a link pin, as shown in the following figure.

3-4. Turn on & Check

Turn on ship’s main power. And turn on radar power.

AIS I/F is operating normally if the button for AIS (refer to 1-1.AIS button) is displayed on the

screen lower left.

, The connection or the setup may not be performed correctly if the AIS button is not displayed.

Please turn off the radar and check connection and a setup.

Note:

Refer to the installation manual in the case of connection.

S101

１

０

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S100

１

０

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S102

１

０

ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

S100

S101

S102

Note.

It differs from "JMA-9800

."

SLOT ANTENNA

ROTARY

JOINT

DRIVE

MOTOR

B101

ENCODER

B102

DL/TRHPL

A303

MIC

A301

IF AMP

VIDEO

AMP

PULSE

TRANS

SWITCHING

CIRCUIT

PC210

AVR

PC1001

INTERFACE CIRCUIT

PC1101

PC301

PC220

ΦA,ΦB,ΦZ

TX TRIG

TUNE CONTROL

MOTOR RELAY

MAIN

SWITCH

P+12V

CONTROL SIRCUIT

+48V,+5V,+3.3V,

±12V

MONITOR RELAY

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

TERMINAL BOARD

CQD−1949

RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUT CDC-1209

MOTHER BOARD

CQC−1094

CPU CONTROL CIRCUT CMC-1218

NSK I/F

CMJ-462A

23.1INCH LCD MONITOR

NWZ-158

INTERSWITCH

NQE-3141-2/-4

USB

P+12V,+24V

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

R

G

B

HS

VS

C

O

N

T

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

+48V,

+5V,

+3.3V

±12V

TRIG/VD

CPU

GDC

MEMORY by

RADAR VIDEO

SCI

WORK

MEMORY

TRIG

DIVIDER

VD

SELECTOR

A/D

DSP

MODULE0

DSP

MODULE1

DSP

MODULE2

DC24V

BEARNG PULSE SELECTOR

BP、BZ、VD、TRIG

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

CHAGE

CIRCUIT

MH

GENERATOR

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

DC+48V

MAG

NKE-1079 SCANNER UNIT

ATT

NTG-3037A/3028 Transmitter-Receiver

SAFETY

SWITCH

S101

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

KEYBOARD UNIT NCE-7721

CCK-900

CCK-901MOUSE

CCK-902

Fig.101 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA,JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

SLOT ANTENNA

ROTARY

JOINT

DRIVE

MOTOR

B101

ENCODER

B102

SAFETY

SWITCH

S101

DL/TRHPL

A303

MIC

A301

IF AMP

VIDEO

AMP

PULAS

TRANS

SWITCHING

CIRCUIT

PC210

AVR

PC1001

INTERFACE CIRCUIT

PC1101

PC301

PC220

ΦA,ΦB,ΦZ

TX TRIG

TUNE CONTROL

MOTOR RELAY

MAIN

SWITCH

P+12V

CONTROL CIRCUIT

+48V,+5V,+3.3V,

±12V

MONTOR RELAY

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

TERMINAL BOARD

CQD−1949

RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUIT CDC-1129

MOTHER BOARD

CQC−1094

CPU CONTROL CIRCUT CMC-1143

NSK I/F

CMJ-462A

23.1 LCD MONTOR

NWZ-158

KEYBORD UNIT NCE-7141

CCK-900

CCK-901MOUSE

INTERSWITCH

NQE-3141

USB

P+12V,+24V

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

R

G

B

HS

VS

C

O

N

T

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

+48V,

+5V,

+3.3V

±12V

TRIG/VD

CPU

GDC

MEMORY by

RADAR VIDEO

SCI

WORK

MMORY

TRIG

DIVIDER

VD

SELECTOR

A/D

DSP

MODULE 0

DSP

MODULE1

DSP

MODULE2

DC24V

BEARING PULSE SELECTOR

BP、BZ、VD、TRIG

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

CHARE

CIRCUIT

MH

GENERATOR

AC220/230V,60Hz 3Φ

AC100/110/220/230V,60Hz 1Φ

DC+48V

MAG

NKE-1075A/NKE-1087 SCANNER UNIT

ATT

除くNKE1087

NCD-4263 DISPLAY UNIT

CCK-902

Fig.102 Block Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA,JMA-992-6XA/9XA

Fig.103(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (self standing type AC 220V 3f)

SCANNER　NKE-10７９

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

MAIN POWER

AC220V　3φ

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

TB103

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB102　　

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

GRY

RED

BLU

４

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H - 2695110056

14-CROES COMPLEX CABLE

H - 2695110056

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

U 1

V 1

W 1

MU 1

MV 1

MW 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

V

U

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPA DATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

CBD-1684

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

BRN

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

BRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

RED

BLU

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-3037A

TB204

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

TB202　　　

YEL

GRN

BRN

YEL

GRN

BRN

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

V 1

W 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

GRY

RED

BLU

４

(OPTION)

Fig.103(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA

-9933-SA (self standing type AC220V AC100V 1f)

SCANNER　NKE-10７９

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

MAIN POWER

AC220V　1φ

AC110V　1φ

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

TB103

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB102　　

YEL

GRN

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

GRY

RED

BLU

４

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H - 2695110056

14-CROES COMPLEX CABLE

H - 2695110056

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

U 1

V 1

W 1

MU 1

MV 1

MW 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

V

U

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPA DATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

CBD-1684

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

YEL

GRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

RED

BLU

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-３0３７A

TB204

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

TB202　　　

YEL

GRN

YEL

GRN

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

V 1

W 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

GRY

RED

BLU

４

(OPTION)

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T

Fig.104(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (desk top type AC 220V 3f)

SCANNER　NKE-10７９

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

MAIN POWER

AC220V　3φ

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB102　　

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

GRY

RED

BLU

４

U 1

V 1

W 1

MU 1

MV 1

MW 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

V

U

YEL

GRN

BRN

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB103

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

TB104

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-３0３７A

TB204

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

TB202　　　

YEL

GRN

BRN

YEL

GRN

BRN

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

V 1

W 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

GRY

RED

BLU

４

(OPTION)

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T

Fig.104(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9933-SA (desk top type AC220V AC100V 1f)

SCANNER　NKE-10７９

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

MAIN POWER

AC220V　1φ

AC110V　1φ

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB102　　

YEL

GRN

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

GRY

RED

BLU

４

U 1

V 1

W 1

MU 1

MV 1

MW 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

V

U

YEL

GRN

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB103

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

TB104

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-３0３７A

TB204

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

TB202　　　

YEL

GRN

YEL

GRN

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

V 1

W 1

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

GRY

RED

BLU

４

(OPTION)

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

Fig.105(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (self standing type AC 220V 3f)

TB102　　

SCANNER

NKE-1075A

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

MAIN POWER

AC220V　3φ

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

J 8

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

BRN

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

+48V

+48VG

U 1

V 1

W 1

1

2

4

UTH

3

U

V

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

BRN

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

BRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

Fig.105(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (self standing type AC220V AC100V 1f)

TB102　　

SCANNER

NKE-1075A

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

MAIN POWER

AC220V　1φ

AC110V　1φ

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

J 8

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

+48V

+48VG

U 1

V 1

W 1

1

2

4

UTH

3

U

V

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

YEL

GRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

Fig.106(1) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (desk top type AC 220V 3f)

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T

MAIN POWER

AC220V　3φ

SCANNER

NKE-1075A

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

TB102　　

J 8

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

BRN

+48V

+48VG

U 1

V 1

W 1

1

2

4

UTH

3

U

V

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

YEL

GRN

BRN

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

Fig.106(2) Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9932-SA (desk top type AC220V AC100 1f)

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T

MAIN POWER

AC220V　1φ

AC110V　1φ

SCANNER

NKE-1075A

PM UNIT

NJU-63B

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

TB102　　

J 8

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

+48V

+48VG

U 1

V 1

W 1

1

2

4

UTH

3

U

V

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

YEL

GRN

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

Fig.107 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (self standing type AC 220V/230V 3f)

SCANNER　NKE-1089

TB104

PM UNIT

NJU-64　　　

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　3φ

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

BRN

GRN

YEL

TB103

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

TB105　　

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

GRY

RED

BLU

４

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

U 1

V 1

W 1

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

E

φB

φA

U

V

UTH

MV 1

MW 1

MU 1

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

BRN

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

BRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-３0２８

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

TB202

YEL

GRN

BRN

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

TB204

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

W 1

V 1

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

YEL

GRN

BRN

(OPTION)

GRY

RED

BLU

４

Fig.108 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (self standing type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　1φ

AC100V/110V　1φ

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

SCANNER　NKE-1089

TB104

PM UNIT

NJU-64　　　

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

GRN

YEL

TB103

TB105　　

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

GRY

RED

BLU

４

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

PR

BLK

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

YEL

GRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

WHT

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

U

V

UTH

1

MCNT +

MCNT -

M +24VG 1

2

M +24V 1

U 1

V 1

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

E

φB

φA

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-３0２８

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

TB202

YEL

GRN

BRN

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

TB204

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

W 1

V 1

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

YEL

GRN

BRN

(OPTION)

GRY

RED

BLU

４

PR

BLK

Fig.109 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (desk top type AC 220V/230V 3f)

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　3φ

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-

4263T

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

SCANNER　NKE-1089

TB104

PM UNIT

NJU-64　　　

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

BRN

GRN

YEL

TB103

TB105　　

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

GRY

RED

BLU

４

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

U 1

V 1

W 1

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

E

φB

φA

U

V

UTH

MV 1

MW 1

MU 1

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

YEL

GRN

BRN

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-３0２８

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

TB202

YEL

GRN

BRN

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

TB204

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

W 1

V 1

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

YEL

GRN

BRN

(OPTION)

GRY

RED

BLU

４

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

Fig.110 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9923-7/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　1φ

AC100V/110V　1φ

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T

BATTERY

TB　　

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

SCANNER　NKE-1089

TB104

PM UNIT

NJU-64　　　

ORG

WHT

３

２

1

GRN

YEL

TB103

TB105　　

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE H-

2695110056

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

TB104

BLU

RED

BLK

GRY

RED

BLU

４

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

PR

BLK

U 1

V 1

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

E

φB

φA

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

+

-

YEL

GRN

RED

BLU

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

WHT

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

U

V

UTH

1

MCNT +

MCNT -

M +24VG 1

2

M +24V 1

(JRC SUPPLY)

TRANSMITTER-RECIVER

UNIT

NTG-３0２８

TB203

RED

BLU

TB201

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -/BZ -

BZ +

MTR -

MTRE

MTR +

+12V

C2

φZE

φZ

φA

E

φB

+48VG

+48V

TB202

YEL

GRN

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

MPS

MCT

TB204

U 0

V 0

W 0

U 1

W 1

V 1

ORG

WHT

1

２

３

YEL

GRN

(OPTION)

GRY

RED

BLU

４

PR

BLK

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

Fig.111 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (self standing type AC 220V/230V 3f)

SCANNER

NKE-1087

PM UNIT

NJU-64

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　3φ

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB102

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

TB105　　

+48V

+48VG

U 1

V 1

W 1

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

J 8

TB104

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

BRN

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

BRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

U

V

UTH

1

MCNT +

MCNT -

M +24VG 1

2

M +24V 1

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

Fig.112 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (self standing type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　1φ

AC100V/110V　1φ

SCANNER

NKE-1087

PM UNIT

NJU-64　　　

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

TB102

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

TB105　　

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

J 8

TB104

+48V

+48VG

U

V

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

TB301

TB302

YEL

GRN

YEL

GRN

TB303

POWER

CBD-1661

YEL

GRN

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

(NC)

1

2

3

U

V

W

1

2

3

U

V

W

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

U

V

UTH

1

MCNT +

MCNT -

M +24VG 1

2

M +24V 1

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

BRN

Fig.113 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 3f)

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　3φ

SCANNER

NKE-1087

PM UNIT

NJU-64　　　

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

BRN

TB102

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

TB105　　

+48V

+48VG

U 1

V 1

W 1

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ

J 8

TB104

YEL

GRN

BRN

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

U

V

UTH

1

MCNT +

MCNT -

M +24VG 1

2

M +24V 1

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

Fig.114 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9922-6/9XA (desk top type AC220V/230V 1f AC100V/110V 1f)

MAIN POWER

AC220V/230V　1φ

AC100V/110V　1φ

SCANNER

NKE-1087

PM UNIT

NJU-64

DISPLAY UNIT　NCD-4263T

14-CORES COMPLEX CABLE

H-2695110056

RED

BLU

YEL

GRN

TB102

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

BLU

RED

BLK

WHT

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

PTI

PTE

LVR

PMS

E

TXI

TXE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

PTI

３

TB101

ORG

WHT

４

２

1

BP +

BP -

BZ +

BZ -

TRIG +

TRIG -

MTR +

VD +

VD -

MTR -

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MTRE

11

TB105　　

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

HEATER POWER

AC100V1φ J 8

TB104

+48V

+48VG

U

V

YEL

GRN

0.6/1kV-TPYCY-6

U

V

W

ＡＮＴ

TB4101　

1

２

３

４

ORG

WHT

VD +

VD -

TRIG +

TRIG -

BP +

BP -

BZ +

MTR +

MTR -

BZ -

MTRE

(NC)

+48V

+48VG

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

RED

BLU

TB4501

DGPS

CONINING DISPLAY

ECHO SOUNDER

ARPADATA

EXT RADAR

TB4401

RED

WHT

BLK

RADAR SIGNAL

ＡＬＭ／ＣＯＭ

TB4601

ALARM MONITORING

SYSTEM

ＬＯＧ

TB4801

1

2

ＧＹＲＯ

TB4701

1

4

5

3

2

GYRO

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

H-2695110006

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-TTYCS-1

250V-TTYCS-4

0.6/1kV-DPYCYS-1.5

250V-MPYCYS-7

LOG

PULSE

250V-TTYCS-1

DLOG

To ECDIS

RBVD

RBVDE

ETIY 3

ETIY 3E

SVD 1

SVD 1E

ETIY 1

EXφA 1

EXφA 1E

ETIY 1E

EXφB 1

EXφB 1E

EXφZ 1

EXφZ 1E

SVD 2

SVD 2E

ETIY 2

ETIY 2E

EXφA 2

EXφA 2E

EXφB 2

EXφZ 2

EXφZ 2E

EXφB 2E

ITIY

ITIYE

EXφAIN

EXφBIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

EXφZEN

EXφINGND

29

30

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

ARPAALM +

ARPAALM -

SYSALM +

SYSALM -

PWRALM +

PWRALM -

ARPAACK +

SYSACK +

SYSACK -

ARPAACK -

PWRACK +

PWRACK -

EXEVT +

EXEVT -

COMCD

COMRX

COMTX

COMDTR

COMSG

COMDSR

COMRTS

COMRI

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

NAV1TX +

NAV1TX -

NAV1RX +

NAV1RX -

NAV2TX

NAV2TX -

NAV2RX +

LOGRX +

LOGRX -

NAV2RX -

ALMTX +

ALMTX -

ALMRX +

ALMRX -

ARPATX +

ARPATX -

JARPATX +

JARPATX -

NSKTX +

NSKTX -

NET -S

TET -C

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

SFA +

SFA -

SFS +

SFS -

PULS 1+

PULS 1-

PULS 2+

SYNC 1+

SYNC 1-

PULS 2-

SYNC 2+

SYNC 2-

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1/R1

2/S1

3/S2

/S3

5/R2

(NC)

U

V

UTH

1

MCNT +

MCNT -

M +24VG 1

2

M +24V 1

(JRC SUPPLY)

(OPTION)

POWER

CBD-1661

U

V

W

TB304

1

2

3

1

2

3

CN1

J4007

J207

J4016

J4001 J4001

TB4101

J4048

J4303

M

U

V

W

DC24V

DC250V

250V CNT

S701

100

200

NFB701

+24V

P+12V

PB7

PB8

PB1 P+12V

PB2 +48V

PB3 +5V

PB4 +3.3V

PB5 ±12V

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

U

V

W

U

V

U0

V0

W0

PWRALM

PSMON

TX/STBY

PS(POWER On/Off)

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+48V

PS

PWRALM

P+12V

+24V

PWRALM

TX/STBY

PS

P+12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

+5V

+3.3V

J3101

TB701

J701

J3

J4

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

U

V

AC100/110V

AC220/230V

U1/TB202

V1/TB202

W1/TB202

U0/TB202

V0/TB202

W0/TB202

+48V

TB203

+5V

+12V

±15V

U1/TB102

V1/TB102

W1/TB102

S1

B101

INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT

NQE-3141

(OPTION)

KEBOARD UNIT NCE-7721

CCK-901

MONTOR

NWZ-158

TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT

CMJ-462A

MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094

CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-

1218

RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN

CIRCUIT

CDC-1029

+3.3V On/Off

+5V On/Off

RELAY CIRCUIT

CSC-632

TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3037)

SCANNER (NKE-1079)DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)

POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)

JAM-9933-SA:110V_1φ, 220V_3φ

Fig.115 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,

Type JMA-9933-SA

CONTROL

CIRCUIT

INSUPUTVOLTAGE

SELECTION

POWER SUPLAY

CBD-1682

TB701

SFA SWITCHI

±12V

CN1

J4007

J207

J4016

J4001 J4001

TB4101

J4048

J4303

M

U

V

W

DC24V

DC250V

250V CNT

S701

100

200

NFB70

1

+24V

P+12V

PB7

PB8

PB1 P+12V

PB2 +48V

PB3 +5V

PB4 +3.3V

PB5 ±12V

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

U

V

W

U

V

U0

V0

W0

PWRALM

PSMON

TX/STBY

PS(POWER On/Off)

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+48V

PS

PWRALM

P+12V

+24V

PWRALM

TX/STBY

PS

P+12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

+5V

+3.3V

J3101

TB701

J701

J3

J4

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

U

V

AC100/110V

AC220/230V

U0/TB102

V0/TB102

W0/TB102

+48V

TB102

S1

B101

INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT

NQE-3141

(OPTION)

KEBOARD UNIT NCE-7721

CCK-901

MONTOR

NWZ-158

TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT

CMJ-462A

MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094

CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-

1218

RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN

CIRCUIT

CDC-1029

+3.3V On/Off

+5V On/Off

SCANNER (NKE-1075)DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)

POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)

JAM-9932-SA:110V_1φ, 220V_3φ

Fig.116 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,

Type JMA-9932-SA

CONTROL

CIRCUIT

INSUPUTVOLTAGE

SELECTION

RELAY CIRCUIT

CSC-632

U0

V0

W0

U1

V1

W1

±15V

+12V

+5V

POWER SUPLAY

CBD-1682

TB701

SFA SWITCHI

CN1

J4007

J207

J4016

J4001 J4001

TB4101

J4048

J4303

M

U

V

W

DC24V

DC250V

250V CNT

S701

100

200

NFB70

1

+24V

P+12V

PB7

PB8

PB1 P+12V

PB2 +48V

PB3 +5V

PB4 +3.3V

PB5 ±12V

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

U

V

W

U

V

U0

V0

W0

PWRALM

PSMON

TX/STBY

PS(POWER On/Off)

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+48V

PS

PWRALM

P+12V

+24V

PWRALM

TX/STBY

PS

P+12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

+5V

+3.3V

J3101

TB701

J701

J3

J4

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

U

V

AC100/110V

AC220/230V

U1/TB202

V1/TB202

W1/TB202

U0/TB202

V0/TB202

W0/TB202

+48V

TB203

+5V

+12V

±15V

U1/TB102

V1/TB102

W1/TB102

S1

B101

INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT

NQE-3141

(OPTION)

KEBOARD UNIT NCE-7721

CCK-901

MONTOR

NWZ-158

TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT

CMJ-462A

MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094

CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-

1218

RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN

CIRCUIT

CDC-1029

+3.3V On/Off

+5V On/Off

RELAY CIRCUIT

CSC-632

TRANSMITTER-RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3028)

SCANNER (NKE-1089)DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)

POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)

JAM-9923-7XA:100V/110V_1φ, 220V/230V_1φ, 220V/230V_3φ

Fig.117 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,

Type JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

CONTROL

CIRCUIT

INSUPUTVOLTAG

E

SELECTION

POWER SUPLAY

CBD-1645

TB701

JAM-9923-9XA: 220V/230V_3φ

SFA SWITCHI

±12V

CN1

J4007

J207

J4016

J4001 J4001

TB4101

J4048

J4303

M

U

V

W

DC24V

DC250V

250V CNT

S701

100

200

NFB70

1

+24V

P+12V

PB7

PB8

PB1 P+12V

PB2 +48V

PB3 +5V

PB4 +3.3V

PB5 ±12V

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

U

V

W

U

V

U0

V0

W0

PWRALM

PSMON

TX/STBY

PS(POWER On/Off)

+24V

P+12V

+48V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+48V

PS

PWRALM

P+12V

+24V

PWRALM

TX/STBY

PS

P+12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

±12V

+5V

+3.3V

+5V

+3.3V

J3101

TB701

J701

J3

J4

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

J1

J2

U

V

AC100/110V

AC220/230V

U0/TB102

V0/TB102

W0/TB102

+48V

TB102

S1

B101

INTERSWITCH CIRCUIT

NQE-3141

(OPTION)

KEBOARD UNIT NCE-7721

CCK-901

MONTOR

NWZ-158

TERMINAL BOARD CQD-1949

NSK/LOG IF CIRCUIT

CMJ-462A

MOTHER BOARD CQC-1094

CPU CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-

1218

RADAR SIGNAL PROCESSIN

CIRCUIT

CDC-1029

+3.3V On/Off

+5V On/Off

SCANNER (NKE-1087)DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4263)

POWER UNIT (CBD-1661)

Fig.118 Primary Power Supply Block Diagram of Radar,

Type JMA-9922-6XA/9XA

CONTROL

CIRCUIT

INSUPUTVOLTAG

E

SELECTION

RELAY CIRCUIT

CSC-632

U0

V0

W0

U1

V1

W1

±15V

+12V

+5V

POWER SUPLAY

CBD-1645

TB701

JAM-9922-6XA:100V/110V_1φ, 220V/230V_1φ, 220V/230V_3φ

JAM-9922-9XA: 220V/230V_3φ

SFA SWITCHI

Fig.119 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, 

Type NKE-1079

Fig.120 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, 

Type NKE-1079-D

Fig.121 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, 

Type NKE-1075/1075A (100V AC,1-phase)

Fig.122 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type 

NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,3-phase)

Fig.123 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, Type 

NKE-1075/1075A (230V AC,1-phase)

Fig.124 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, 

Type NKE-1089-7/9 (1-phase)

Fig.125 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, 

Type NKE-1089-7/9 (3-phase)

Fig.126 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, 

Type NKE-1087-6/9 (1-phase)

Fig.127 Internal Connection Diagram of Scanner Unit, 

Type NKE-1087-6/9 (3-phase)

Fig.128 Internal Connection Diagram of 

Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3037/3037A

Fig.129 Internal Connection Diagram of 

Transmitter-receiver Unit, Type NTG-3028

Fig.130 Internal Connection Diagram of Display Unit, 

Type NCD-4263

Fig.131 Internal Connection Diagram of CRT Monitor of Display Unit, 

Type NCD-4263

POWER CONTROL

CIRCUIT

P+12V

+48V±3V

+5.0V

+3.3V

-12V

+12V

HI VOLTAGE SAVE CIRCUIT

MONITOR

POWER

VOLTAGE SELCT

CIRCUIT

BLEAKER LINE FILTER

HI VOLTAGE SELCT

CIRCUIT

SCANNER

MOTOR POWER

FAN ALM　POWER CONTROL

3.5A

MAX15A

(10A)

MAX 10A

(8A)

2A

1A

INTERSWITCH=1A

KEBOAD UNIT=2.5A

SCANNER

X BAND_2.5A, S BAND_3.0A

RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 9.3A

CPU CONTROL CIRCUT = MAX 5.4A

RADAR SIGNAL PROCCESSIN = MAX 4.7A

NSK UNIT = MAX 1.0A

1.37A

0.7A

AC100/230V

1φ/1φ,3φ

MONITOR

AC100/230V

1φ

SCANNER

MOTOR

POWER

AC100/230V

1φ/1φ,3φ

Fig.132 Block Diagram of Radar,

Type JMA-9933-SA and JMA-9923-7XA/9XA

Fig.133 List of NSK and LOG Select Switches of Display 

Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.134 Setting Table of Speed LOG Select Switches of 

Display Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.135 Setting Table of Gyro Compass and Gyro Select Switches 

ofDisplay Unit, Type NCD-4263

Fig.136 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 2-unit Interswitchse System, Type•@NQE-3141-2

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

TB4201

ISW IN/OUT

TB4201

ISW IN/OUT

DISPLAY1

DISPLAY2

1

2

BLU

YEL

GRN

BLU-BLU

BLU-WHT

ORG

BLK

PNK

BRN

RED

PUR

WHT

YEL-YEL

YEL-WHT

NCD-4263

H-2695111153

(JRC SUPPLY)

CH-1

TB911

TB912

DISPLAY1

NCD-4263

TB4201

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

DISPLAY2

BCD-4263

TB4201

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

DISPLAY3

NCD-4263

TB4201

CH-2

TB913

TB914

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

CH-3

TB915

TB916

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

NKE-3141-4

CCL-304

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

VDIN 1

VDIN 1E

TRIGIN 1

TRIGIN 1E

BPIN 1

BPIN 1E

BZIN 1

MTRIN 1+

MTRIN 1-

BZIN 1E

MTRIN 1E

PWRIN 1+

PWRIN 1E

PWROUT 1

PWROUT 1E

VDOUT 1

VDOUT 1E

TRIGOUT 1

TRIGOUT 1E

BPOUT 1

BPOUT 1E

BZOUT 1E

MTROUT 1+

BZOUT 1

MTROUT 1-

MTORUT 1E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

1

2

BLU

YEL

GRN

BLU-BLU

BLU-WHT

ORG

BLK

PNK

BRN

RED

PUR

WHT

YEL-YEL

YEL-WHT

1

2

BLU

YEL

GRN

BLU-BLU

BLU-WHT

ORG

BLK

PNK

BRN

RED

PUR

WHT

YEL-YEL

YEL-WHT

1

2

BLU

YEL

GRN

BLU-BLU

BLU-WHT

ORG

BLK

PNK

BRN

RED

PUR

WHT

YEL-YEL

YEL-WHT

2

RED

PUR

WHT

YEL-YEL

YEL-WHT

1

BLU

YEL

GRN

BLU-BLU

BLU-WHT

ORG

BLK

PNK

BRN

2

RED

PUR

WHT

YEL-YEL

YEL-WHT

1

BLU

YEL

GRN

BLU-BLU

BLU-WHT

ORG

BLK

PNK

BRN

2

RED

PUR

WHT

YEL-YEL

YEL-WHT

1

BLU

YEL

GRN

BLU-BLU

BLU-WHT

ORG

BLK

PNK

BRN

Fig.137 Terminal Board Connection Diagram of 4-unit Interswitches System, Type NQE-3141-4

H-2695111153 (JRC SUPPLY)

Fig.138(1) Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-2

Terminal board

J15(ISW)

J903

1

2

3

4

5

6

-15V

GND

5 V

+15V

P903

1

2

3

4

5

6

-15V

GND

5 V

+15V

1

2

1

2

VIN+

VIN-

ＴＢ912

ＴＢ914

ＴＢ916

ＴＢ918

ＴＢ911

ＴＢ913

ＴＢ915

ＴＢ917

CH-4CH-3

CH-2CH-1

J3 J3

1

26

CCL-304

P902J2

J1

CBD-1675H-7ZCRD0971

H-7ZCRD0972

1

26

1

26

CQD-1973 CQD-1973

H-7ZCRD0970A

Terminal board

J4(ISW-1CH)

Terminal board

J5(ISW-1CH)

11.MTROUTE

10.MTROUT-

9.MTROUT+

8.BZOUTE

7.BZOUT

5.BPOUT

6.BPOUTE

2.VDOUTE

3.TRGOUT

4.TRGOUTE

1.VDOUT

15.PWROUTE

14.PWROUT

13.RWRINE

12.PWRIN

11.MTRINE

9.MTRIN+

10.MTRIN-

6.BPINE

7.BZIN

8.BZINE

5.BPIN

4.TRGINE

3.TRGIN

2.VDINE

1.VDIN

CH-1

TB 911 TB 912 TB 913 TB 914 TB 915 TB 916 TB 917 TB 918

1

2

CCL-304

TO

DISPLAY1

NCD-4263

TB4201

TO

DISPLAY2

NCD-4263

TB4201

TO

DISPLAY3

NCD-4263

TB4201

Fig.138(2) Internal Connection Diagram of Interswitch, Type NQE-3141-4

CH-2 CH-3 CH-4

3

J903

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

J904

J905

1

2

J909

-15V

GND

5 V

+15V

AC(L)

AC(N)

TRTP+

E

POWLED

TRTP-

FANV

FANE

FANPLS

1

2

3

4

5

6

-15V

GND

5 V

+15V

P903P902

1

3

5

AC(L)

AC(N)

FG

S

P904

P905

P909

CN2

CN1P901

LOAD

B

C

D

A

LINE

12

34

UV

E

TB901

AC100V-240V

TE901

FG

CD901

R901

H-7ZCRD0920

H-7ZCRD0921

H-7ZCRD0919

CBA-357

B901

CB901

C901 C902 C903

LF901

HEAD OFFICE & Akasaka Twin Tower (Main),

SALES DEPT. 17-22, Akasaka 2-chome, Minato-ku,

Tokyo 107-8432 JAPAN

Phone : +81-3-3584-8711

Fax : +81-3-3584-8715

Telex : 0242-5420 JRCTOK J

MAIN PLANT 1-1, Shimorenjaku 5-chome, Mitaka-shi,

Tokyo 181-8510 JAPAN

Phone : +81-422-45-9111

Fax : +81-422-45-9110

Telex : 02822-351 JRCMTK J

CODE No. 7ZPRD0572

Nittochi Nishi-shinjuku bldg

10-1,Nishi-Shinjuku 

6-chome,Shinjuku-ku Tokyo 160-8328

Japan

Phone:+81-3-3348-0151

Fax :+81-3-3348-3648

1-1,Shimorenjaku 5-chome,Mitaka-shi

Tokyo 181-8510 Japan

Phone:+81-422-45-9111

Fax :+81-422-45-9110

FIRST EDITION

ARP 2004

JRC

7ZPRD0606

JRC JMA9922_9XA Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info